Gryphon GM4130 - Barcode Reader DATALOGIC - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free Gryphon GM4130 DATALOGIC in PDF.
User questions about Gryphon GM4130 DATALOGIC
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Barcode Reader in PDF format for free! Find your manual Gryphon GM4130 - DATALOGIC and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Gryphon GM4130 by DATALOGIC.
USER MANUAL Gryphon GM4130 DATALOGIC
General Purpose Handheld Linear Imager or Laser Barcode Readers
Gryphon I GD4100/GM4100 Gryphon BT4100/ L GD4300

natural_image
Two Galaxia brand medical scanner devices with blue-lit ports, shown from different angles (no text or symbols visible on device body)
natural_image
Black Grypton barcode scanner with digital display and base mount (no visible text or symbols on device body)Product Reference Guide
Datalogic Scanning, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, Oregon 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140
An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Datalogic Scanning, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or "Datalogic Scanning"). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.
Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.scanning.data-logic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page.
Disclaimer
Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.
Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S.A and the E.U. All other brand and product names referred to herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Microsoft Windows ^® , Windows ^® XP and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Patents
This product is covered by one or more of the following patents:
US Pat.: 6,512,218 B1; 6,808,114 B1; 6,877,664 B1; 6,997,385 B2; 7,053,954 B1; 7,102,116 B2; 7,282,688 B2; 7,387,246 B2.
European Pat.: 996,284 B1; 999,514 B1; 1,128,315 B1; 1,396,811 B1.
Additional patents pending.
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION 9
About this Manual 9
Overview 9
Manual Conventions 10
References 10
Technical Support 10
Datalogic Website Support 10
Reseller Technical Support 10
Telephone Technical Support 10
About the Reader 11
The BC40xx™ Radio Base 12
Base LEDs 12
Base Button 12
BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection 13
Display 14
Battery Safety 15
Programming the Reader 16
Configuration Methods 16
SETUP 17
Unpacking 17
Setting Up the Reader 17
Installing the Interface Cable 18
Configuring the Base Station 20
Changing the Base Station Position 21
Connecting the Base Station 22
Linking the Reader to a Base Station 24
Linking a BT Reader to a PC 25
GRYPHON™ I System and Network Layouts 26
Stand Alone Layouts 26
Interface Selection 28
Setting the Interface 28
Customizing Configuration Settings 32
Configure Interface Settings 32
Global Interface Features 32
Configuring Other Features 32
Software Version Transmission 32
Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults 33
Replacing the Battery 34
CONFIGURATION USING BARCODES 37
Configuration Parameters 37
Reading Configuration Barcodes 38
GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES 39
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore 39
USB Suspend Mode 39
RS-232 ONLY Interface 41
Baud Rate 42
Data Bits 43
Stop Bits 43
Parity 44
Handshaking Control 45
RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces....46
Intercharacter Delay 47
Beep On ASCII BEL 47
Beep On Not on File 48
ACK NAK Options 49
Contents
ACK Character 50
NAK Character 50
ACK NAK Timeout Value ....51
ACK NAK Retry Count 51
ACK NAK Error Handling 52
Indicate Transmission Failure 52
Disable Character 53
Enable Character 53
Keyboard Interface....55
Country Mode 56
Caps Lock State 59
Numlock 59
Send Control Characters 60
Wedge Quiet Interval 61
Intercharacter Delay 62
Intercode Delay 63
USB Keyboard Speed 64
USB-OEM Interface 67
USB-OEM Device Usage 68
Interface Options 68
IBM 46XX Interface 69
46xx Number of Host Resets 70
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format 72
Interface Options 72
Wand Emulation Interface 73
Wand Signal Speed 74
Wand Polarity 74
Wand Idle State 75
Transmit Noise 75
Label Symbology Conversion 76
Data Format 77
Global Prefix/Suffix 78
Global AIM ID 79
GS1-128 AIM ID 80
Label ID 81
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets 81
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology 81
Label ID Control 82
Label ID Symbology Selection 83
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters 89
Case Conversion 90
Character Conversion 90
Reading Parameters 91
Double Read Timeout 92
Label Gone Timeout 93
Sleep Mode Timeout 94
LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS 96
Power On Alert 96
Good Read: When to Indicate 96
Good Read Beep Type 97
Good Read Beep Frequency 97
Good Read Beep Length 98
Good Read Beep Volume 99
Good Read LED Duration 100
SCANNING FEATURES 101
Scan Mode 101
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout 102
Stand Detection 103
Stand Mode Sensitivity 104
Scanning Active Time 104
Flash On Time 105
Flash Off Time 105
Green Spot Duration 106
Code Selection 107
DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES 108
CODE EAN/UPC 109
Coupon Control 109
UPC-A 110
UPC-A Enable/Disable 110
UPC-A Check Character Transmission 110
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 111
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission 111
UPC-A Minimum Reads 112
UPC-E 113
UPC-E Enable/Disable 113
UPC-E Check Character Transmission 113
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 114
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A 114
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission 115
UPC-E Minimum Reads 115
GTIN FORMATTING 116
EAN 13 (JAN 13) 117
EAN 13 Enable/Disable 117
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission 117
EAN-13 Flag 1 Character 118
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion 118
EAN 13 Minimum Reads 119
ISSN 120
ISSN Enable/Disable 120
EAN 8 (JAN 8) 121
EAN 8 Enable/Disable 121
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission 121
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 122
EAN 8 Minimum Reads 122
UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS 123
UPC/EAN Decoding Level 123
UPC/EAN Correlation 124
UPC/EAN Price Weight Check 124
In-Store Minimum Reads 125
ADD-ONS 126
Optional Add-ons 126
Optional Add-On Timer 127
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer 130
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads 133
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads 134
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads 135
CODE 39 136
Code 39 Enable/Disable 136
Code 39 Check Character Calculation 136
Code 39 Check Character Transmission 137
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission 138
Code 39 Full ASCII 138
Code 39 Quiet Zones 139
Code 39 Minimum Reads 140
Code 39 Decoding Level 141
Code 39 Length Control 142
Code 39 Set Length 1 143
Code 39 Set Length 2 144
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio 145
Code 39 Character Correlation 147
Code 39 Stitching 147
CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE) 148
Code 32 Enable/Disable 148
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions 148
Code 32 Check Char Transmission 149
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission 149
CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL) 150
Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable 150
CODE 128 151
Code 128 Enable/Disable 151
Expand Code 128 to Code 39 151
Code 128 Check Character Transmission 152
Code 128 Function Character Transmission 152
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission 153
Code 128 Quiet Zones 154
Code 128 Minimum Reads 155
Code 128 Decoding Level 156
Code 128 Length Control 157
Code 128 Set Length 1 158
Code 128 Set Length 2 159
Code 128 Character Correlation 160
Code 128 Stitching 160
GS1-128 161
GS1-128 Enable 161
CODE ISBT 128 162
ISBT 128 Concatenation 162
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation 162
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode 163
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout 164
ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options 164
CODABLOCK F 165
Codablock F Enable/Disable 165
Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable 165
Codablock F AIM Check 166
Codablock F Length Control 166
Codablock F Set Length 1 167
Codablock F Set Length 2 168
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) 169
12 of 5 Enable/Disable 169
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ....169
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ....170
12 of 5 Minimum Reads .... 171
2 of 5 Decoding Level 172
12 of 5 Length Control 173
12 of 5 Set Length 1 174
12 of 5 Set Length 2 175
12 of 5 Character Correlation 176
12 of 5 Stitching 176
FOLLETT 2 OF 5 177
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable 177
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR 177
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable 177
STANDARD 2 OF 5 178
Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable 178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation 178
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission 179
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads 179
Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level 180
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control 180
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 181
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 182
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation 183
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching 183
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 184
Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable 184
Contents
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .... 184
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission 185
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control 185
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 186
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 187
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads 188
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching 188
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation 189
CODE IATA 190
IATA Enable/Disable 190
IATA Check Character Transmission 190
DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 ....191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable 191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .... 191
Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads 192
Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level 192
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control 193
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1 194
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2 195
Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation .... 196
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching 196
CODABAR 197
Codabar Enable/Disable 197
Codabar Check Character Calculation 197
Codabar Check Character Transmission 198
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission 198
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set 199
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match 199
Codabar Quiet Zones 200
Codabar Minimum Reads 201
Codabar Decoding Level 202
Codabar Length Control 203
Codabar Set Length 1 204
Codabar Set Length 2 205
Codabar Interdigit Ratio 206
Codabar Character Correlation 208
Codabar Stitching 208
ABC CODABAR 209
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable 209
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode 209
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout 210
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation 211
CODE 11 212
Code 11 Enable/Disable 212
Code 11 Check Character Calculation 212
Code 11 Check Character Transmission 213
Code 11 Minimum Reads 213
Code 11 Length Control 214
Code 11 Set Length 1 215
Code 11 Set Length 2 216
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio 217
Code 11 Decoding Level 219
Code 11 Character Correlation 220
Code 11 Stitching 220
GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL 221
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable 221
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation 221
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads 222
GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED 223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable 223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation 223
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads 224
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control 224
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 225
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 226
GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED 227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable 227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation 227
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads 228
CODE 93 229
Code 93 Enable/Disable 229
Code 93 Check Character Calculation 229
Code 93 Check Character Transmission 230
Code 93 Length Control 230
Code 93 Set Length 1 231
Code 93 Set Length 2 232
Code 93 Minimum Reads 233
Code 93 Decoding Level 234
Code 93 Quiet Zones 235
Code 93 Stitching 236
Code 93 Character Correlation 236
MSI 237
MSI Enable/Disable 237
MSI Check Character Calculation 237
MSI Check Character Transmission 238
MSI Length Control 238
MSI Set Length 1 239
MSI Set Length 2 240
MSI Minimum Reads 241
MSI Decoding Level 242
MSI Stitching 243
MSI Character Correlation 243
PLESSEY 244
Plessey Enable/Disable 244
Plessey Check Character Calculation 245
Plessey Check Character Transmission 245
Plessey Length Control 246
Plessey Set Length 1 247
Plessey Set Length 2 248
Plessey Minimum Reads 249
Plessey Decoding Level 250
Plessey Stitching 251
Plessey Character Correlation 251
CODE 4 252
Code 4 Enable/Disable 252
Code 4 Check Character Transmission 252
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion 253
CODE 5 253
Code 5 Enable/Disable 253
Code 5 Check Character Transmission 254
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion 254
CODE 4 AND CODE 5 COMMON CONFIGURATION ITEMS ......255
Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level 255
Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads 256
WIRELESS FEATURES 257
WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES 258
Good Transmission Beep 258
Beep Frequency 258
Beep Duration 259
Beep Volume 260
Disconnect Beep 260
Base Station Beep 261
Leash Alarm 261
CONFIGURATION UPDATES 263
Automatic Configuration Update 263
Copy Configuration to Scanner 263
Copy Configuration to Base Station 264
Automatic Flash Update 264
Request Flash Update 265
Powerdown Timeout 265
BATCH FEATURES 267
Batch Mode 267
Send Batch 267
Erase Batch Memory 268
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay 268
RF ADDRESS STAMPING 269
Source Radio Address Transmission 269
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character 269
Features for Star Models Only 270
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout 270
STAR Radio Transmit Mode 270
DISPLAY FEATURES 272
Contrast 272
Font Size 272
Backlight 273
Display Mode 273
Display Timeout 274
Keypad Select 276
Bluetooth-Only Features....277
BT SECURITY FEATURES 277
BT Security Mode 277
BT Pin Code 278
OTHER BT FEATURES 279
BT Poll Rate 279
LASER FEATURES 281
Laser Scan Angle 282
Laser Idle Mode 282
Bi-Directional Read Decoding 283
Always On Scan Mode Timeout 284
REFERENCES.... 285
RS-232 Parameters 285
RS-232 Only 285
RS-232/USB COM Parameters 286
Keyboard Interface 293
Wedge Quiet Interval 293
Intercharacter Delay 294
Intercode Delay 295
Symbologies 296
Decoding Level 296
Set Length 296
Data Editing 298
Global Prefix/Suffix 299
Global AIM ID 300
Label ID 301
Character Conversion 305
Reading Parameters 306
Label Gone Timeout 306
Good Read LED Duration 307
Scanning Features 308
Scan Mode 308
Scanning Active Time 309
Flash On Time 310
Flash Off Time 311
Contents
Display Settings 312
Display Mode 312
RF Features 312
Configuration Update 312
RF Address Stamping 312
BT-Only Features 315
MESSAGE FORMATTING.... 317
Message Formatting 317
Cursor Control 318
Font Selection 318
Clearing Display 319
LED and Beeper Control 319
Messages from Scanner Command Keys 320
Technical Specifications 321
Standard Cable Pinouts 324
LED and Beeper Indications ....325
Error Codes 326
Base Station Indications 327
Standard Defaults 329
Sample Barcodes 341
Keypad 345
Scancode Tables 349
Control Character Emulation ....349
Single Press and Release Keys 349
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE 350
Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode 352
Digital Interface 354
IBM31xx 102-key 355
IBM XT 356
Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 ....357
Index 359
Chapter 1 Introduction
About this Manual
This Product Reference Guide (PRG) is provided for users seeking advanced technical information, including connection, programming, maintenance and specifications. The Quick Reference Guide (QRG) and other publications associated with this product are downloadable free of charge from the website listed on the back cover of this manual.
Overview
Chapter 1, (this chapter) presents information about manual conventions, and an overview of the reader, its features and operation.
Chapter 2, Setup presents information about unpacking, cable connection information and setting up the reader.
Chapter 3, Configuration Using Barcodes provides instructions and barcode labels for customizing your reader. There are different sections for interface types, general features, data formatting, symbology-specific and model-specific features.
Chapter 4, Wireless Features describes options and programming related to radio communication features for the RF variants of the Gryphon family.
Chapter 5, Laser Features describes options and programming specific to laser models.
Chapter 6, References provides background information and detailed instructions for more complex programming items.
Chapter 7, Message Formatting provides details for programming options.
Appendix A, Technical Specifications lists physical and performance characteristics, as well as environmental and regulatory specifications. It also provides standard cable pin-outs and LED/Beeper functions.
Appendix B, Standard Defaults references common factory default settings for reader features and options.
Appendix C, Sample Barcodes offers sample barcodes of several common symbologies.
Appendix D, Keypad includes numeric barcodes to be scanned for certain parameter settings.
Appendix E, Scancode Tables lists control character emulation information for Wedge and USB Keyboard interfaces.
Manual Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
The symbols listed below are used in this manual to notify the reader of key issues or procedures that must be observed when using the reader:

Notes contain information necessary for properly diagnosing, repairing and operating the reader.

The CAUTION symbol advises you of actions that could damage equipment or property.
CAUTION
References
Current versions of this Product Reference Guide (PRG), Quick Reference Guide (QRG), the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration application, and any other manuals, instruction sheets and utilities for this product can be downloaded from the website listed below. Alternatively, printed copies or product support CDs for most products can be purchased through your Datalogic reseller.
Technical Support
Datalogic Website Support
The Datalogic website (www.scanning.datalogic.com) is the complete source for technical support and information for Datalogic products. The site offers product support, product registration, warranty information, product manuals, product tech notes, software updates, demos, and instructions for returning products for repair.
Reseller Technical Support
An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized Datalogic reseller. A reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses, application software, and computer systems and can provide individualized assistance.
Telephone Technical Support
If you do not have internet or email access, you may contact Datalogic technical support at (541) 349-8283 or check the back cover of your manual for more contact information.
About the Reader
Typically, units are factory-programmed for the most common terminal and communications settings. If you need to modify any programmable settings, custom configuration can be accomplished by scanning the programming barcodes within this guide.
Several models of the Gryphon are available, and are covered in this manual:
- Gryphon I GD4100 - Corded linear imager bar code reader
- Gryphon I GM4100 - Cordless linear imager barcode reader with Datalogic STAR™.
• Gryphon L GD4300 - Model with Laser scan engine.
• Gryphon I BT 4100 - Model with Bluetooth options.
Programming can alternatively be performed using the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration application which is downloadable from the Datalogic website listed on the back cover of this manual. This multi-platform utility program allows device configuration using a PC. It communicates to the device using a serial or USB cable and can also create configuration barcodes to print.
Advancements in the LED technology used in the imager-based readers significantly improve the illumination of the target field of view, resulting in higher scan efficiency. Whether used in Single Trigger or Continuous Mode, the ergonomic design of the reader will help to promote comfortable handling during extended periods of use.
See "Interface Selection" on page 28 for a listing and descriptions of available interface sets by model type.
The BC40xx™ Radio Base
Base LEDs
LEDs on the Gryphon I Base provide information about the Base's status, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. Gryphon I Base LEDs

text_image
YELLOW LED RED LED / GREEN LED BUTTONThe following table describes the significance of each LED:
| LED STATUS | ||
| Power on / Data | Yellow On = Base is poweredYellow Blinking = Base receives data and commands from the Host or the Reader. | |
| Charging Red On = Battery charging is in progress. | ||
| Charge completed Green On = the Battery is completely charged. | ||
| Charging + Charge completed | Red and Green Blinking together = the Reader is not correctly placed onto the Base. | |
See Base Station Indications on page 327 for more specific details on the LEDs.
Base Button
The Base contains a button which is used primarily to perform a paging function. Pressing the button causes a sound signal to be emitted by all scanners linked with this Base, as long as the scanner is awake (see Powerdown Timeout on page 265) and reception is enabled (see Sleep Mode Timeout on page 94). The button can also be used to "force device connection" via the Datalogic Aladdin Software tool (available for free download from the Datalogic website). See the Aladdin Online Help for details.
Star Model
For the Star model, press and hold (longer than one second) to initiate paging.
BT Model
For the BT model, press quickly (less than one second) to initiate paging. Press and hold (longer than one second) to enable radio linking. This will make the base discoverable from a BT master.
BC40XX UV Counterfeit Detection
The BC40XX Radio Base is available with a UV Counterfeit Money Detector, typically used to verify the authenticity of bank notes. Other uses for counterfeit detection are passport, ticket, credit card, travelers' check and similar applications where it is possible to detect fluorescent marks with UV light.
The detector contains eight special UV LEDs, as shown below:

text_image
UV LEDsThe Counterfeit Detector is based on UV fluorescent emission. Real banknotes under ultraviolet rays usually absorb the UV light and will show special marks made with fluorescent inks. On the other hand, most counterfeit banknotes only reflect the UV lights, without showing fluorescent marks.
To use:
-
Quickly press the Base button to light the UV LEDs.
-
Hold the item to be verified under the LED lights to ensure that the special fluorescent marks are visible.

natural_image
Close-up of a hand holding a black electronic device with a visible label and orange light (no readable text or symbols)
- The LEDs are set to switch off automatically after about 2 minutes. To keep the UV LEDs in always-on mode, quickly press the Base button a second time within 10 seconds of the first press. To switch them off, simply press the button again.
An external power supply is necessary for full functionality of the Base station with UV Counterfeit Detector. Use only the recommended AC adapter 12Vdc.
Display
The Gryphon GM4100 is available with an optional Display. The Display features 4 lines and 16 characters, and offers icons and three additional keys to allow a better interaction with a remote host.
Fonts, contrast, backlight and other parameters can be configured for the Display. See Display Features on page 272 and Message Formatting on page 317 for more information.
Figure 2. Gryphon™ I Display

text_image
STAR-FIELD COVERAGE Yell BATTERY CHARGE STATUSBattery Safety
To reinstall, charge and/or perform any other action on the battery, follow the instructions in this manual.

Before installing the Battery, read "Battery Safety" on this and the following pages. Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.

Do not discharge the battery using any device except for the scanner. When the battery is used in devices other than the designated product, it may damage the battery or reduce its life expectancy. If the device causes an abnormal current to flow, it may cause the battery to become hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury.
Lithium-ion battery packs may get hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury if exposed to abusive conditions. Be sure to follow the safety warnings listed below:
- Do not place the battery pack in fire or heat.
- Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the battery pack to each other with any metal object (such as wire).
- Do not carry or store the battery pack together with metal objects.
- Do not pierce the battery pack with nails, strike it with a hammer, step on it or otherwise subject it to strong impacts or shocks.
- Do not solder directly onto the battery pack.
- Do not expose the battery pack to liquids, or allow the battery to get wet.
- Do not apply voltages to the battery pack contacts.
In the event the battery pack leaks and the fluid gets into your eye, do not rub the eye. Rinse well with water and immediately seek medical care. If left untreated, the battery fluid could cause damage to the eye.

Always charge the battery at 32^-104^ ( 0^-40^ ) temperature range.
Use only the authorized power supplies, battery pack, chargers, and docks supplied by your Datalogic reseller. The use of any other power supplies can damage the device and void your warranty.
Do not disassemble or modify the battery. The battery contains safety and protection devices, which, if damaged, may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite.
Do not place the battery in or near fire, on stoves or other high temperature locations.
Do not place the battery in direct sunlight, or use or store the battery inside cars in hot weather. Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite. Using the battery in this manner may also result in a loss of performance and a shortened life expectancy.
Do not place the battery in microwave ovens, high-pressure containers or on induction cookware.
Immediately discontinue use of the battery if, while using, charging or storing the battery, the battery emits an unusual smell, feels hot, changes color or shape, or appears abnormal in any other way.
Do not replace the battery pack when the device is turned on.
Do not remove or damage the battery pack's label.
Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any part.
Battery pack usage by children should be supervised.
As with other types of batteries, Lithium-Ion (LI) batteries will lose capacity over time. Capacity deterioration is noticeable after one year of service whether the battery is in use or not. It is difficult to precisely predict the finite life of a LI battery, but cell manufacturers rate them at 500 charge cycles. In other words, the batteries should be expected to take 500 full discharge / charge cycles before needing replacement. This number is higher if partial discharging / recharging is adhered to rather than full / deep discharging,
The typical manufacturer advertised useful life of LI batteries is one to three years, depending on usage and number of charges, etc., after which they should be removed from service, especially in mission critical applications. Do not continue to use a battery that is showing excessive loss of capacity, it should be properly recycled / disposed of and replaced. For most applications, batteries should be replaced after one year of service to maintain customer satisfaction and minimize safety concerns.
Collect and recycle waste batteries separately from the device in compliance with European Directive 2006/66/EC, 2002/95/EC, 2002/96/EC and subsequent modifications, US and China regulatory and others laws and regulations about the environment.
Programming the Reader
Configuration Methods
Programming Barcodes
The reader is factory-configured with a standard set of default features. After scanning the interface barcode, you can select other options and customize your reader through use of the instructions and programming barcode labels available in the corresponding features section for your interface. Customizable settings for many features are found in "Configuration Using Barcodes" starting on page 37.
Some programming labels, like "Restore Custom Defaults" on page 33, require only the scan of the single label to enact the change. Most, however, require the reader to be placed in Programming Mode prior to scanning them. Scan an ENTER/EXIT barcode once to enter Programming Mode. Once the reader is in Programming Mode, scan a number of parameter settings before scanning the ENTER/EXIT barcode a second time, which will then accept your changes, exit Programming Mode and return the reader to normal operation.

There are some exceptions to the typical programming sequence described above. Please read the description and setting instructions carefully when configuring each programmable feature.
Datalogic Aladdin™
Datalogic Aladdin ^™ is a multi-platform utility program providing a quick and user-friendly configuration method via the RS-232/USB-COM interface. Aladdin is available on the CD-ROM provided with your product, and also from the Datalogic website. Aladdin allows you to program the reader by selecting configuration commands through a user-friendly graphical interface running on a PC. These commands are sent to the reader over the selected communication interface, or they can be printed as barcodes to be scanned.
Aladdin also provides the ability to perform a software upgrade for the connected device (see the Datalogic Aladdin ^TM Help On-Line for more details).
Chapter 2 Setup
Unpacking
Check carefully to ensure the reader and any accessories ordered are present and undamaged. If any damage occurred during shipment, contact Datalogic Technical Support. Information is shown on page 10.
KEEP THE PACKAGING. Should the unit ever require service, it should be returned in its original shipping container.
Setting Up the Reader
Depending on whether you are using a Corded or Mobile version of the Gryphon, follow the steps provided in this section to connect and get your reader up and communicating with its host.
- Begin by Installing the Interface Cable (Corded) or Connecting the Base Station (Mobile)
- Go to Interface Selection and set the desired interface.
- Configure Interface Settings (only if not using factory settings for that interface)
- Go to Configuring Other Features (if modifications are needed from factory settings)
Installing the Interface Cable
For Corded versions, connect the reader cable by inserting the cable into the handle as shown in Figure 3. To remove it, insert a paper clip into the release aperture, then unplug the cable.
Figure 3. Connect/disconnect the cable

natural_image
Technical illustration of a handheld device with two views showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)RS-232 Serial Connection

Turn off power to the terminal/PC and connect the reader to the terminal/PC serial port via the RS-232 cable as shown in Figure 4. If the terminal will not support POT (Power Off the Terminal) to supply reader power, use the approved power supply (AC Adapter). Plug the AC Adapter barrel connector into the socket on the RS-232 cable connector and the AC Adapter plug into a standard power outlet.
Figure 4. RS-232 Connection

natural_image
Diagram of a medical device connected to a wall-mounted cable, showing internal components and wiring (no text or labels)Keyboard Wedge Connection

The Keyboard Wedge cable has a 'Y' connection from the reader. Connect the female to the male end from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port at the terminal/PC. Reference Figure 5.
Figure 5. Keyboard Wedge Interface connection

text_image
Diagram showing connections between a computer, cable, and a handheld device with labeled ports and connectorsUSB Connection

Connect the reader to a USB port on the terminal/PC using the correct USB cable for the interface type you ordered. Reference Figure 6.
Figure 6. USB connection

text_image
Diagram showing a medical device connected to a computer via a medical device with a cable, indicating a medical device's connection to the computer.Other connection types are described below and illustrated in Figure 7.
Figure 7. Other Interface Connections

text_image
USB Keyboard Wedge or... +3M or...
Specific cables are required for connection to different hosts. The connectors illustrated above are examples only. Actual connectors may vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the reader remain the same.
RF Models
The power supply connects directly to the base (not on the cable's jack) for all configurations. For all interfaces (except RS-232) a power supply is recommended but not necessary, because the base can be powered from the Host. When the base is powered from the Host, select a slow charge rate.
Configuring the Base Station
The base charger/station may be configured in desk application to hold the reader in two different positions, either a horizontal or standing position, in order to provide the most comfortable use depending on needs.

natural_image
Black handheld digital scanner device with blue handle (no visible text or symbols)Standing

natural_image
Close-up of a black automotive headset with blue accent and control buttons (no text or symbols visible)Horizontal
Changing the Base Station Position
The base station is configured by installing one of two sets of mechanical parts that come with the cordless kit. The default mounts (shown below) provide three options: vertical (wall) mounting, standing (45°), or horizontal mounting with a higher mechanical retention of the scanner. Use the other mounts only for horizontal mounting, with lower retention of the scanner. The different parts may be interchanged to customize retention preferences.

A tool such as a rigid pen or a flat screwdriver can be used to change the mounts. Do not allow it to touch the contacts.
- Insert the appropriate parts for the desired base station position, as shown below.

text_image
Standing, Horizontal or Vertical Horizontal Only- Using your thumbs, push open the plastic tabs on the bottom of the base to free the wing holders.

text_image
Tab Tab- The stand can now be repositioned in either horizontal or standing position.

text_image
Horizontal StandingConnecting the Base Station
Figure 8 shows how to connect the Base Station to a terminal, PC or other host device. Turn off the host before connection and consult the manual for that equipment (if necessary) before proceeding. Connect the interface cable before applying power to the Base Station.

Gryphon Mobile can also be Powered by the Terminal. The external power supply is recommended but not necessary. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is automatically set as Slow charge.
Base Station Connection and Routing: Fully insert the Power Cable and Interface (I/F) Cable connectors into their respective ports in the underside of the Base Station (see Figure 8). Then connect to an AC Adapter, and plug the AC power cord into the (wall) outlet.
Figure 8. Connecting the Base Station

text_image
I/F Cable AC/DC Adapter Wall plug Connector DC Power Cord Base StationSecuring the DC Power Cord (Optional)
The DC power cord for the adapter can be secured to the bottom of the base in order to maximize the mechanical retention of the cable itself. The routing of the power cord can be changed to accommodate the base station positioning: horizontal, stand or wall mounting. The cables can be looped around to the front of the Base Station, or fed directly out the back of the Base Station, as shown in Figure 9 on page 23.
Figure 9. Options for routing the DC cord

natural_image
Two views of a device showing internal components with black wires and red arrows indicating connection (no text or symbols)Please refer to the arrows depicted on the bottom of the base when placing the cables, detailed in Figure 10.
Figure 10. Arrows showing routing

natural_image
Exterior view of a gray plastic enclosure with internal compartments and red directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)Host Connection: Verify before connection that the reader's cable type is compatible with your host equipment. Most connections plug directly into the host device as shown below. Keyboard Wedge interface cables have a 'Y' connection where its female end mates with the male end of the cable from the keyboard and the remaining end at the keyboard port on the terminal/PC.
Figure 11. Connecting to the Host

flowchart
graph TD
A["Base Station"] -->|USB| B["Device"]
A -->|USB/Wand| C["Device"]
A -->|USB/IBM| D["Device"]
B --> E["Device"]
C --> F["Device"]
D --> G["Device"]
style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
Power Connection: Plug the AC Adapter in to an approved AC wall socket with the cable facing downwards (as shown in Figure 8) to prevent undue strain on the socket.

Gryphon Mobile can also be Powered by the Terminal. The external power supply is recommended but not necessary. When powered by the Terminal, the battery charger is automatically set as Slow charge.
Disconnecting the Cable: To detach the cable, insert a paper clip or similar object into the hole on the base, as shown in Figure 12.
Figure 12. Disconnecting the Cable

text_image
Insert Paper ClipLinking the Reader to a Base Station
RF Devices
For RF devices, before configuring the interface it is necessary to link the handheld with the base. To link the handheld and the base, press the trigger to wake it and place it on the base. If the reader was previously linked to another base, you must first scan the Unlink action command before re-linking to the new base.

text_image
UnlinkBT Models only
Remember: The mandatory condition for establishing a new linking between a BT handheld and a BT base is that the handheld is unlinked and they share the same security configuration. A successful link is indicated by three ascending tones from the reader. A high-low-high-low tone indicates the link attempt was unsuccessful. A single green LED flash after this tone indicates no Base Station was discovered. Two green LED flashes after this tone indicates that more than one Base Station was discovered and the reader did not link. Three LED flashes after this tone indicate a security error.
Linking a BT Reader to a PC
The reader can optionally be linked to a Bluetooth-enabled PC with the serial port profile, in either server mode or client mode.
Linking to a PC in Server Mode (BT Slave Mode)
To link a BT reader in server mode to a Bluetooth-enabled PC, follow these steps:
- Install any drivers provided with the Bluetooth adapter.
- Scan the Link to a PC in Server Mode barcode to make the scanner visible to the host computer..

Link to a PC in Server Mode
- Use the host computer's Bluetooth manager to "Discover new devices" and select "Data-logic Scanner." If you receive an error message, it may be necessary to disable security on the device.
- Select "connect" on the PC to link the reader to the PC. Use an RS-232 terminal program to see incoming data on the port designated by the computer's Bluetooth manager.
Linking to a PC in Client Mode (BT Master Mode)
The reader can optionally be linked in client mode to a Bluetooth-enabled PC with the serial port profile. To do this, follow these steps:
- Ensure the PC or terminal can network with B bluetooth devices and that it is powered on.
- Ensure that a COM port is assigned under Services within the bluetooth setup menu.
- Create a Link label that contains the address of the PC bluetooth adapter.

NOTE
The bluetooth address can be found under "Properties" within in the bluetooth setup menu.
The link label is a Code 128 function 3 label with the following format:
- Scan the link label you created in step 3.
GRYPHON™ I System and Network Layouts
Stand Alone Layouts
Figure 13. Single Reader Layout

text_image
HOST GRYPHON™ I CRADLEFigure 14. Multiple Reader Layout

text_image
Gryphon M4100 only (not valid for BT model) HOST GRYPHON™ I CRADLEIn stand alone systems, each cradle is connected to a single Host.
Figure 15. Multiple Stand Alone Layouts

flowchart
graph TD
A["HOST"] --> B["GRYPHON™ I"]
B --> C["CRADLE"]
C --> D["HOST"]
E["HOST"] --> F["GRYPHON™ I"]
F --> G["CRADLE"]
G --> H["HOST"]
style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
note right of F: "Gryphon M4100 only (not valid for BT model)"
Many stand alone connections can operate in the same physical area without interference, provided all readers and cradles in the system have different addresses.
Interface Selection
Upon completing the physical connection between the reader and its host, proceed to Table 1 starting on page 29 to select the interface type the reader is connected to (for example: RS-232, Keyboard Wedge, USB, etc.). Scan the appropriate barcode in that section to configure your system's correct interface type.
Each reader model will support one of the following sets of host interfaces:
General Purpose Models Retail Point of Sale Models
• R S - 2 3 2
• R S - 2 3 2
- RS-232 OPOS
- RS-232 OPOS
- USB
USB
- Keyboard Wedge
- IBM 46XX
- Wand Emulation
Setting the Interface
Scan the programming barcode from this section which selects the appropriate interface type matching the system the reader will be connected to. Next, proceed to the corresponding section in this manual (also listed in Table 1 starting on page 29) to configure any desired settings and features associated with that interface.

Unlike some programming features and options, interface selections require that you scan only one programming barcode label. DO NOT scan an ENTER/EXIT barcode prior to scanning an interface selection barcode.
Some interfaces require the scanner to start in the disabled state when powered up. If additional scanner configuration is desired while in this state, pull the trigger and hold it for five seconds. The scanner will change to a state that allows programming with barcodes.
Table 1. Available Interfaces
| RS-232 FEATURES | ||
| RS-232 standard interface | Select RS232-STD | Set RS-232 Interface Features starting on page 41 |
Select RS232-WN | RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf | |
| RS-232 for use with OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS | Select RS-232 OPOS | |
Select USB-COM-STDa | USB Com to simulate RS-232 standard interface | |
| IBM | FEATURES | |
Select IBM-P5B | IBM-46xx Port 5B reader interface | Set IBM Interface Features starting on page 69 |
| IBM-46xx Port 9B reader interface | Select IBM-P9B | |
| USB-OEM FEATURES | ||
Select USB-OEM | USB-OEM(can be used for OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS) | Set USB-OEM Interface Features starting on page 67 |
a. Download the correct USB Com driver from www.datalogic.com
| KEYBOARD FEATURES | ||
| AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 w/Standard Key Encoding | Select KBD-AT | Set KEYBOARD WEDGE Interface Features starting on page 55 |
Select KBD-AT-NK | Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with standard key encoding but without external keyboard | |
| AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 w/Alternate Key | Select KBD-AT-ALT | |
Select KBD-AT-ALT-NK | Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with alternate key encoding but without external keyboard | |
| PC/XT w/Standard Key Encoding | Select KBD-XT | |
Select KBD-IBM-3153 | Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminal 3153 | |
| KEYBOARD — cont. FEATURES | ||
| Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals31xx, 32xx, 34xx, 37xx make only keyboard | Select KBD-IBM-M | Set KEYBOARDWEDGEInterfaceFeaturesstarting on page55 |
Select KBD-IBM-MB | Keyboard Wedge for IBM Terminals31xx, 32xx, 34xx, 37xx make break keyboard | |
| Keyboard Wedge for DIGITAL Terminals VT2xx, VT3xx, VT4xx | Select KBD-DIG-VI | |
Select USB Keyboard | USB Keyboard with standard key encoding | |
| USB Keyboard with alternate key encoding | Select USB Alternate Keyboard | |
Select USB-KBD-APPLE | USB Keyboard for Apple computers | |
| WAND EMULATION FEATURES | ||
| Wand Emulation | Select WAND | Set WANDInterfaceFeaturesstarting on page73 |
Customizing Configuration Settings
Configure Interface Settings
If after scanning the interface barcode from the previous table, your installation requires you to select options to further customize your reader, turn to the appropriate section for your interface type in "Configuration Using Barcodes" starting on page 37.
- "RS-232 ONLY Interface" on page 41
• "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46 - "Keyboard Interface" on page 55
- "USB-OEM Interface" on page 67
- "IBM 46XX Interface" on page 69
• "Wand Emulation Interface" on page 73
Global Interface Features
See "Global Interface Features" on page 39 for settings configurable by all interface types.
Configuring Other Features
If your installation requires different programming than the standard factory default settings, the following sections of this manual allow configuration of non-interface-specific settings you might require:
Reading Parameters: Reading Parameters include programming for scanning, beeper and LED indicators and other universal settings.
Code Selection: Includes options concerning the barcode label types (symbologies). These settings allow you to enable/disable symbologies, set label lengths, require check digit, etc.
Wireless Features: Contains programming options for RF and Bluetooth models only.
Laser Features: Describes options and programming specific to laser models.
Software Version Transmission
The software version of the device can be transmitted over the RS-232 and Keyboard interfaces by scanning the following label.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines above and below the barsTransmit Software Version
Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults
If you aren't sure what programming options are in your imager, or you've changed some options and want to restore the Custom Default Configuration that may have been saved in the scanner, scan the Restore Custom Default Configuration barcode below. This will restore the custom configuration for the currently active interface.

Custom defaults are based on the interface type. Configure the imager for the correct interface before scanning this label.

Restore Custom Default Configuration
Restore Factory Configuration
If you want to restore the Factory Configuration for your imager, scan either the Restore USA Factory Configuration barcode or the Restore EU Factory Configuration barcode below. Both labels restore the scanner configuration to the factory settings, including the interface type. The USA label restores Label IDs to those historically used in the USA. The EU label restores Label IDs to those historically used in Europe. The Label ID sets for USA and EU are shown in the "Label ID" section on page 81 of this manual.

Restore USA Factory Configuration

Restore EU Factory Configuration
The programming items listed in the following sections show the factory default settings for each of the menu commands.
Replacing the Battery

Before replacing the Battery, read "Battery Safety" starting on page 15. Datalogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.
To change the battery of your reader, complete the following instructions.
- With a screwdriver, unscrew the battery cover screw.

natural_image
Close-up of a black toilet with a red circular button highlighting the lens (no text or symbols visible)- Unscrew and remove the three screws securing the battery holder, and unplug the white connector.

text_image
Screw Connector Screw Screw- Carefully lift out the gold contacts circuit, and remove the battery holder while letting the white connector pass through the hole in the battery holder (as shown in the picture below).

text_image
Pass-through hole- Remove the old battery from its place (if present), and insert the new battery in the same position.
- Replace the battery holder and three screws, plug in the connector, and return the contacts circuit to its previous location.

When inserting the new battery into the handle, take care to position the battery and the connector as shown.
- Insert the cover in the handle and screw it back into place.

natural_image
Black handheld scanner with blue handle (no visible text or symbols)Battery replacement is now complete.
NOTES
Chapter 3
Configuration Using Barcodes
This and following sections provide programming barcodes to configure your reader by changing the default settings. For details about additional methods of programming, see Configuration Methods on page 16.

You must first enable your reader to read barcodes in order to use this section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 1 and complete the appropriate procedure.
Configuration Parameters
Once the reader is set up, you can change the default parameters to meet your application needs. Refer to "Standard Defaults" starting on page 329 for initial configuration in order to set the default values and select the interface for your application.
The following configuration parameters are applicable to all Gryphon models covered in this manual, unless otherwise indicated. The items are divided into logical groups, making it easy to find the desired function based on its reference group.
Interface Configuration:
• "RS-232 ONLY Interface" on page 41
- "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 46
- "Keyboard Interface" on page 55
- "USB-OEM Interface" on page 67
• "IBM 46XX Interface" on page 69
• "Wand Emulation Interface" on page 73
Parameters common to all interface applications:
- "Data Format" on page 77 gives options to control the messages sent to the Host system.
- "Reading Parameters" on page 91 control various operating modes and indicators status functioning.
Symbology-specific parameters:
- "Code Selection" on page 107 provides configuration of a personalized mix of codes, code families and their options.
Model-specific parameters:
- "Wireless Features" on page 257 offers configuration of radio control parameters for RF and Bluetooth models.
- "Laser Features" on page 281 provides options specific to laser models.
Reading Configuration Barcodes

You must first enable your reader to read barcodes in order to use this section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 1 and complete the appropriate procedure.
To program features:
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode, available at the top of each programming page, when applicable.
- Scan the barcode to set the desired programming feature. You may need to cover unused barcodes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only the barcode you intend to scan.
- If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the appropriate characters from the keypad.

Additional information about many features can be found in the "References" chapter.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Complete the programming sequence b y scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode to exit Programming Mode.
For detailed descriptions, programming information and examples for setting selected configuration items, see References, starting on page 285.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Host Commands — Obey/Ignore
GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES
The following interface features are configurable by all interface types.
Host Commands — Obey/Ignore
This option specifies whether the reader will obey or ignore host commands. When set to ignore, the reader will ignore all host commands except for those necessary for:
• service mode
- flash programming mode
- keeping the interface active
- transmission of labels.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotHost Commands = Obey

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesHost Commands = Ignore
USB Suspend Mode
This setting enables/disables the ability of USB interfaces to enter suspend mode.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotUSB Suspend Mode = Disable

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesUSB Suspend Mode = Enable
NOTES
RS-232 ONLY INTERFACE
BAUD RATE on page 42
DATA BITS on page 43
STOP BITS on page 43
PARITY on page 44
HANDSHAKING CONTROL on page 45
Use the programming barcodes in this section if modifications to the standard RS-232 interface settings are necessary to meet your system's requirements. Additional settings which apply to both the RS-232 and USB interfaces are available in the next section, "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" starting on page 4-46.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.

RS-232 ONLY Interface ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Baud Rate
See page 285 for information on this feature.
Baud Rate = 1200 | |
Baud Rate = 2400 | |
Baud Rate = 4800 | |
Baud Rate = 9600 | ![]() |
Baud Rate = 19,200 | |
Baud Rate = 38,400 | |
Baud Rate = 57,600 | |
Baud Rate = 115,200 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Data Bits
Data Bits
This parameter allows the reader to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol for sending and receiving data.
| 7 Data Bits | |
8 Data Bits | ![]() |
Stop Bits
Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements. See page 285 for more information on this feature.
![]() | ![]() |
2 Stop Bits |

RS-232 ONLY Interface ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Parity
This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. Select the parity type according to host device requirements. See page 285 for more information.
![]() | Parity = None |
Parity = Even | |
Parity = Odd |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Handshaking Control
Handshaking Control
See page 285 for more information about this feature.
![]() | ![]() |
| Handwriting control, HRC | |
![]() | |
![]() | |
| H | |
![]() | |
![]() | |
| Han |
RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES
| INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 47 |
| BEEP ON ASCII BEL on page 47 |
| BEEP ON NOT ON FILE on page 48 |
| ACK NAK OPTIONS on page 49 |
| ACK CHARACTER on page 50 |
| NAK CHARACTER on page 50 |
| ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE on page 51 |
| ACK NAK RETRY COUNT on page 51 |
| ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING on page 52 |
| INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE on page 52 |
| DISABLE CHARACTER on page 53 |
| ENABLE CHARACTER on page 53 |
The programming barcodes in this chapter allow modifications to the standard RS-232 and USB-Com interfaces. Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Intercharacter Delay
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
See page 286 for more information.
Intercharacter Delay = No Delay | |
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting | |
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | CANCEL |
DEFAULT
00 = No Intercharacter Delay
Beep On ASCII BEL
When this parameter is enabled, the reader issues a beep when a

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.Beep On ASCII BEL = Disable

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the center.Beep On ASCII BEL = Enable

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Beep On Not on File
This option enables/disables the action of the reader to sound a three beep sequence upon receiving a Not-On-File (NOF) host command.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Beep On Not On File = Disable


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotBeep On Not On File = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ACK NAK Options
ACK NAK Options
This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol. See page 287 for more information.
![]() | ACK/NAK Protocol = Disable ACK/NAK |
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission | |
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for host-command acknowledge | |
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge |
ACK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See page 287 for more information.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the optionData Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

text_image
Select ACK Character SettingDEFAULT
0x06 'ACK' Character
NAK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See page 288 for more information.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

text_image
Select NAK Character SettingDEFAULT
0x15 'NAK' Character

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ACK NAK Timeout Value
ACK NAK Timeout Value
This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout.
See page 288 for more information on setting this feature.

Select ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
01 ACK NAK Timeout value is 200ms
ACK NAK Retry Count
This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries. See page 289 for more information.

Select ACK NAK Retry Count Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
003 = 3 Retries

RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ACK NAK Error Handling
This feature specifies the method the reader uses to handle receive errors detected while waiting for an ACK character from the host.
![]() | ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors Detected |
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid ACK Character | |
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid NAK Character |
Indicate Transmission Failure
This option enables/disables the reader's ability to sound an error beep to indicate a transmission failure while in ACK/NAK mode.
Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable Indication | |
Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable Indication | ![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Disable Character
Disable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.
See page 291 for more information on setting this feature.

Select Disable Character Setting
DEFAULT
0x44 = Disable Character is 'D'
Enable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.
See page 292 in “References” for more information on setting this feature.

Select Enable Character Setting
DEFAULT
0x45 = Enable Character is 'E'
NOTES
KEYBOARD INTERFACE
| COUNTRY MODE on page 56 |
| CAPS LOCK STATE on page 59 |
| NUMLOCK on page 59 |
| SEND CONTROL CHARACTERS on page 60 |
| WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL on page 61 |
| INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 62 |
| INTERCODE DELAY on page 63 |
| USB KEYBOARD SPEED on page 64 |
Use the programming barcodes in this chapter to select options for USB Keyboard and Wedge Interfaces. Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
Information about control character emulation which applies to keyboard interfaces is listed in Appendix E, Scancode Tables.
Country Mode
This feature specifies the country/language supported by the keyboard.
Only the following interfaces support ALL Country Modes.
• USB Keyboard (without alternate key encoding)
- AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 w/Std Key Encoding
- Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with standard key encoding but without external keyboard
- AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 & 95 without Alternate Key
- Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 without alternate key encoding but without external keyboard
All other interfaces support ONLY the following Country Modes: U.S., Belgium, Britain, France, Germany, Italy, Spain, Sweden.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the center.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesCountry Mode = U.S.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and patterns
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' in the center.Country Mode = Britain
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.
Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Country Mode = Czechoslovakia

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Country Mode
Country Mode — continued
Country Mode = Denmark | Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. |
Country Mode = France | |
Country Mode = Germany | |
| Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. | Country Mode = Hungary |
Country Mode = Italy | |
| Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. | Country Mode = Japanese 106-key |
Country Mode = Norway | Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. |
Country Mode = Poland | Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. |
| Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. | Country Mode = Portugal |
Country Mode = Romania | Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. |
| Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. | Country Mode = Slovakia |
Country Mode = Spain | |
Country Mode = Sweden | |
Country Mode = Switzerland | Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description. |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Caps Lock State
Caps Lock State
This option specifies the format in which the reader sends character data. This applies to keyboard wedge interfaces. This does not apply when an alternate key encoding keyboard is selected.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and patternsCaps Lock State = Caps Lock ON
Caps Lock State = AUTO Caps Lock Enable
Numlock
This option specifies the setting of the Numbers Lock (Numlock) key while in keyboard wedge interface. This only applies to alternate key encoding interfaces. It does not apply to USB keyboard.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the center.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesNumlock = Numlock key unchanged
Numlock = Numlock key toggled

Keyboard Interface ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Send Control Characters
This feature Specifies how the reader transmits ASCII control characters to the host. Reference Appendix E, Scancode Tables for more information about control characters.
Options are as follows:
Control Character 00. Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 01. Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Capital Key, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 02. Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to 0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table (Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 — see "Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252" on page 357).
![]() | Wedge Send Control Characters = 00 |
Wedge Send Control Characters = 01 | |
Wedge Send Control Characters = 02 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Wedge Quiet Interval
Wedge Quiet Interval
This option specifies the amount of time to look for keyboard activity before the reader breaks the keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The selectable range for this feature is from 0 to 990ms in 10ms increments.

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.
See page 293 in "References" for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
Select Wedge Quiet Interval Setting | |
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | CANCEL |

text_image
DEFAULT10 = Quiet Interval of 100 ms
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.
See page 294 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
| Intercharacter Delay = No Delay | |
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting | |
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | CANCEL |
DEFAULT
00 = No Intercharacter Delay

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Intercode Delay
Intercode Delay
Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds.
See page 295 in "References" for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.
Set Intercode Delay | |
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | CANCEL |

00 = No Wedge Intercode Delay
USB Keyboard Speed
This option specifies the USB poll rate for a USB keyboard.

This feature applies ONLY to the USB Keyboard interface.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom left.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomUSB Keyboard Speed = 4ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 5ms

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE USB Keyboard Speed
USB Keyboard Speed — continued
USB Keyboard Speed = 6ms | |
USB Keyboard Speed = 7ms | |
USB Keyboard Speed = 8ms | |
USB Keyboard Speed = 9ms | |
USB Keyboard Speed = 10ms |
NOTES
USB-OEM INTERFACE
USB-OEM DEVICE USAGE on page 68
INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 68
Feature settings for USB interfaces differ depending upon which host type the reader will be connected with. Use the feature settings in this chapter and "IBM 46XX Interface" on page 69 to specifically configure for the USB-OEM interface. Other USB interfaces are included in the appropriate chapter for their host type.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
USB-OEM Device Usage
The USB-OEM protocol allows for the reader to be identified as one of two different types of barcode scanners. Depending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a USB-OEM POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all devices to communicate.
Options are:
- Table Top Scanner
- Handheld Scanner

It may be necessary to switch device usage when connecting two readers/scanners of the same type to a POS system.
USB-OEM Device Usage = Table Top Scanner | |
USB-OEM Device Usage = Handheld Scanner | ![]() |
Interface Options
This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.
Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands | |
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands | ![]() |
IBM 46XX INTERFACE
46xx NUMBER OF HOST RESETS on page 70
TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT on page 72
INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 72
Use the barcodes in this section to configure programmable features for available IBM 46XX interfaces.
Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.

46xx Number of Host Resets
Specifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the reader starts a five-second period to allow the user to enter Programming Mode and configure the reader. The configurable range for this feature is 1 to 15 resets.
46xx Number of Host Resets = 1 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 2 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 3 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 4 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 5 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 6 | ![]() |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 7 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 46xx Number of Host Resets
46xx Number of Host Resets — cont.
46xx Number of Host Resets = 8 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 9 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 10 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 11 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 12 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 13 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 14 | |
46xx Number of Host Resets = 15 |
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
This feature enable/disables translation to Code 39 before transmitting label data to an IBM-46XX or a USB-OEM host. Only the symbology identifier is modified for the translation. The data is not converted to Code 39 or verified to be valid for Code 39.
Options are:
IBM Standard Format. Send labels in standard IBM format.
Code 39 Format. Translate the following symbologies to Code 39:
- USB-OEM: Code128, Code 93, and Codabar
• IBM-Port 5B: Code 128, Code 93, and Codabar
• IBM-Port 9B: Code 93 and Codabar


text_image
Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format = IBM Standard Format
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotTransmit Labels in Code 39 Format = Code 39 Format
Interface Options
This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.
Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands | |
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands | ![]() |
WAND EMULATION INTERFACE
| WAND SIGNAL SPEED on page 74 |
| WAND POLARITY on page 74 |
| WAND IDLE STATE on page 75 |
| TRANSMIT NOISE on page 75 |
| LABEL SYMBOLOGY CONVERSION on page 76 |
This chapter provides feature/settings configuration for the Wand Emulation interface. Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
Wand Signal Speed
This feature specifies the speed of the Wand output signal per nominal bar or space. Choices are:
• 330 microseconds
- 660 microseconds
Wand Signal Speed = 330ms | |
Wand Signal Speed = 660ms | ![]() |
Wand Polarity
This option specifies the polarity of the Wand output signal. Choices are:
- Quiet zones and spaces are high, bars are low
- Quiet zones and spaces are low, bars are high

TTL logic levels:
0V <= Low <= 0.7V
2.4V <= High <= 5.25V

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Wand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces High, Bars Low

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesWand Polarity = Quiet Zones & Spaces Low, Bars High

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Wand Idle State
Wand Idle State
This feature specifies the level of the Wand output signal when the reader is idle.

TTL logic levels:
$$ 0 \mathrm{V} < = \text { Low } < = 0. 7 \mathrm{V} $$
$$ 2. 4 \mathrm{V} < = \text { High } < = 5. 2 5 \mathrm{V} $$
Wand Idle State = Low | |
Wand Idle State = High | ![]() |
Transmit Noise
This option specifies the leading/trailing noise for the Wand interface.
![]() | Transmit Noise = Disable |
Transmit Noise = Transmit leading noise | |
Transmit Noise = Transmit trailing noise | |
Transmit Noise = Transmit leading and trailing noise |
Label Symbology Conversion
When this feature is enabled for the Wand Emulation interface, all barcode labels are converted to a single symbology.
Options are:
- No conversion
- Convert to Code 39 symbology
- Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII
- Convert to Code 128 symbology

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Label Symbology Conversion = No conversion
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotLabel Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 39

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesLabel Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 39 Full ASCII

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.Label Symbology Conversion = Convert to Code 128
DATA FORMAT
| GLOBAL PREFIX/SUFFIX on page 78 |
| GLOBAL AIM ID on page 79 |
| GS1-128 AIM ID on page 80 |
| LABEL ID starting on page 81•Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets•Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology•Label ID Control•Label ID Symbology Selection•Set Global Mid Label ID Characters |
| CASE CONVERSION on page 90 |
| CHARACTER CONVERSION on page 90 |

CAUTION
It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.
The features in this chapter can be used to build specific user-defined data into a message string. See “References” starting on page 298 for more detailed instructions on setting these features.
Global Prefix/Suffix
This option sets up to 20 characters each from the set of ASCII characters or any hex value from 00 to FF. The characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the barcode data, also called a header) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the barcode data, also called a footer). See page 299 for more detailed instructions on setting this feature.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode above to place the unit in Programming Mode, then the "Set Global Prefix" or "Set Global Suffix," barcode followed by the digits (in hex) from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to terminate the string. Exit programming mode by scanning the ENTER/EXIT barcode again.
Set Global Prefix | |
Set Global Suffix | |
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | CANCEL |

No Global Prefix Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)
Global AIM ID

This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology types.
AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label identifiers) can be included with scanned barcode data. AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows:
- A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
- A code character (see the table below), followed by...
- A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).
| SYMBOLOGY CHAR | SYMBOLOGY CHAR | ||
| UPC/EAN | E^a | Code 128/GS1-128 C | |
| Code 39 and Code 32 | A | DataBar Omnidirectional, DataBar Expanded | e |
| Codabar F Standard 2 of 5 S | |||
| Interleaved 2 of 5 I ISBN | X^b | ||
| Code 93 | G | Code 11 | H |
a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs.
b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.Global AIM ID = Enable
Global AIM ID = Disable

Data Format ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1-128 AIM ID
If Global AIM ID is disabled, the AIM ID for GS1-128 can be enabled/disabled independently. The AIM ID for GS1-128 is a ]C1, ]C2 or ]C3.
AIM IDs for other symbologies can be enabled/disabled independently as well. Contact Customer Support for assistance
GS1-128 AIM ID = Disable | |
GS1-128 AIM ID = Enable | ![]() |
Label ID
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex 0x01-0xFF), used to identify a barcode (symbology) type. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted barcode data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded set (see "Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets" below) or individually per symbology (see "Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 81). If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see the previous feature "Global AIM ID" on page 79.
See Label ID, starting on page 301 of "References" for more information on setting this feature.
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets
The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. See Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets, starting on page 301 for details on the USA set and the EU set.

CAUTION
When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults will be lost.

text_image
DEFAULT
Label ID Pre-loaded Set = USA Set

text_image
Label ID Pre-loaded Set = EU SetLabel ID: Set Individually Per Symbology
This feature configures a Label ID individually for a single symbology. See Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology, starting on page 303 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Label ID Control
This option controls whether a Label ID is disabled, or sent as a prefix or suffix for a given symbology type.
![]() | Label ID Transmission = Disable |
Label ID Transmission = Enable as Prefix | |
Label ID Transmission = Enable as Suffix | |
CANCEL | Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Label ID Symbology Selection
Label ID Symbology Selection
This option selects the symbology for which a Label ID is to be configured. See "Label ID" on page 81 or page 303 in "References" for more detailed instructions.
Set UPC-A Label ID Character(s) | |
Set UPC-A/P2 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set UPC-A/P5 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set UPC-A/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set UPC-E Label ID Character(s) | |
Set UPC-E/P2 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set UPC-E/P5 Label ID Character(s) |

Data Format ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set UPC-E/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set EAN 13 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set EAN 13/P2 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set EAN 13/P5 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set EAN 13/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set EAN 8 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set EAN 8/P2 Label ID Character(s) |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Label ID Symbology Selection
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set EAN 8/P5 Label ID Character(s) | |
| Set EAN 8/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set GTIN Label ID Character(s) | |
| Set GTIN/P2 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set GTIN/P5 Label ID Character(s) | |
| Set GTIN/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Code 39 Label ID Character(s) |

Data Format ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set Code 32 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Code 39 CIP Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Code 128 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set GS1-128 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Codablock F Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Follett 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) | |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Label ID Symbology Selection
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set IATA Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Datalogic 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Codabar Label ID Character(s) | |
Set ABC Codabar Label ID Character(s) |

Data Format ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set Code 11 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID Character(s) | |
Set DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s) | |
Set DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Code 93 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set MSI Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Plessey Label ID Character(s) | |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Set Global Mid Label ID Characters
Label ID Symbology Selection — continued
Set Anker Plessey Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Code 4 Label ID Character(s) | |
Set Code 5 Label ID Character(s) |
Set Global Mid Label ID Characters
Specifies mid-label ID that is added for transmission between the labels of a two-label pair.
To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode above to place the unit in Programming Mode, then the "Set Global Mid Label ID Character(s)" barcode followed by the digits (in hex) from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to terminate the string. Exit programming mode by scanning the ENTER/EXIT barcode again.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dotsSet Global Mid Label ID Character(s)
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL

No Mid Label ID
Character (00)
Case Conversion
This feature allows conversion of the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.

Case conversion affects ONLY scanned barcode data, and does not affect Label ID, Prefix, Suffix, or other appended data.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Case Conversion = Disable (no case conversion)
text_image
Case Conversion = Convert to upper case
text_image
Case Conversion = Convert to lower caseCharacter Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.

If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.

text_image
Configure Character Conversion
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF (No character conversion)
READING PARAMETERS
| DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT on page 92 | GOOD READ LED DURATION on page 100 |
| LABEL GONE TIMEOUT on page 93 | SCAN MODE on page 101 |
| SLEEP MODE TIMEOUT on page 94 | STAND MODE TRIGGERED TIMEOUT on page 102 |
| POWER ON ALERT on page 96 | STAND DETECTION on page 103 |
| GOOD READ: WHEN TO INDICATE on page 96 | STAND MODE SENSITIVITY on page 104 |
| GOOD READ BEEP TYPE on page 97 | SCANNING ACTIVE TIME on page 104 |
| GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY on page 97 | FLASH ON TIME on page 105 |
| GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH on page 98 | FLASH OFF TIME on page 105 |
| GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME on page 99 | GREEN SPOT DURATION on page 106 |

Reading Parameters ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Double Read Timeout
Double Read Timeout prevents a double read of the same label by setting the minimum time allowed between reads of labels of the same symbology and data. If the unit reads a label and sees the same label again within the specified timeout, the second read is ignored. Double Read Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull for each label read.
Double Read Timeout = 0.1 Second | |
Double Read Timeout = 0.2 Second | |
Double Read Timeout = 0.3 Second | |
Double Read Timeout = 0.4 Second | ![]() |
Double Read Timeout = 0.5 Second | |
Double Read Timeout = 0.6 Second | |
Double Read Timeout = 0.7 Second |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Label Gone Timeout
Double Read Timeout — continued

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central 'B' symbolDouble Read Timeout = 0.8 Second

text_image
Barcode image containing encoded digital informationDouble Read Timeout = 0.9 Second

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomDouble Read Timeout = 1 Second
Label Gone Timeout
This feature sets the time after the last label segment is seen before the reader prepares for a new label. The timeout can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (2.55 seconds) in 10ms increments. Label Gone Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull for each label that is read. See page 306 in “References” for detailed instructions and examples for setting this feature.

Select Label Gone Timeout Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
016 = Timeout of 160 ms
Sleep Mode Timeout
This feature sets the amount of time that the reader will be idle before it enters into a low power Sleep Mode. When in Sleep Mode the reader can no longer receive commands from the Host or base station until it is woken up again by a trigger pull or being placed into a base station.
In order for the reader to enter Sleep Mode, the following conditions must be met:
Corded version (GD4100 only). RS-232 interface and trigger single, trigger multiple or trigger pulse.
Mobile version (GM4100 only). Sleep state is allowed only on the handheld (not on the base) when trigger single, trigger multiple or trigger pulse are set, and when the reader is not charging the battery.

This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon Laser or Gryphon BT models
Sleep Mode Timeout = Disable | ![]() |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 1 Second | |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 2 Seconds | |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 3 Seconds | |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 4 Seconds |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Sleep Mode Timeout
Sleep Mode Timeout — continued
| Sleep Mode Timeout = 5 Seconds | |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 6 Seconds | |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 7 Seconds | |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 8 Seconds | |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 9 Seconds | |
Sleep Mode Timeout = 10 Seconds |
LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS
Power On Alert
Disables or enables the indication (from the Beeper) that the reader is receiving power.
Power On Alert = Disable (No Audible Indication) | |
Power On Alert = Four Beeps | ![]() |
Good Read: When to Indicate
This feature specifies when the reader will provide indication (beep and/or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a barcode.

This option, which uses CTS, is only valid for RS-232 interfaces.
This item is not configurable for the GM4100/GBT 4100 models.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central vertical bar
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central vertical barIndicate Good Read = After Transmit
Indicate Good Read = After CTS Goes Inactive, Then Active

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Good Read Beep Type
Good Read Beep Type
Specifies whether the good read beep has a mono or bitonal beep sound.
![]() | Good Read Beep Type = Mono |
Good Read Beep Type = Bitonal |
Good Read Beep Frequency
Adjusts the good read beep to sound at a selectable low, medium or high frequency, selectable from the list below. (Controls the beeper's pitch/tone.)
Good Read Beep Frequency = Low | |
Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium | |
![]() | Good Read Beep Frequency = High |

Reading Parameters ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Good Read Beep Length
| Good Read Beep Length = 60 msec | |
Good Read Beep Length = 80 msec | ![]() |
Good Read Beep Length = 100 msec | |
Good Read Beep Length = 120 msec | |
Good Read Beep Length = 140 msec | |
Good Read Beep Length = 160 msec | |
Good Read Beep Length = 180 msec | |
Good Read Beep Length = 200 msec |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Good Read Beep Volume
Good Read Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume (loudness) upon a good read beep. There are three selectable volume levels.
Good Read Beep Volume = Beeper Off | |
Good Read Beep Volume = Low | |
Good Read Beep Volume = Medium | |
Good Read Beep Volume = High | ![]() |
Good Read LED Duration
This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (0.001 to 2.55 seconds) in 100ms increments.
See page 307 in “References” for detailed instructions and examples for setting this feature.

text_image
Select Good Read LED Duration SettingMake a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

DEFAULT
020 = Good Read LED stays on for 2 seconds.

Indicators are dimmed during sleep.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Scan Mode
SCANNING FEATURES
Scan Mode
Selects the reader's scan operating mode. See page 308 in "References" for descriptions.
Scan Mode = Trigger Single | ![]() |
Scan Mode = Trigger Hold Multiple | |
Scan Mode = Trigger Pulse Multiple | |
Scan Mode = Flashinga | |
Scan Mode = Always Onb | |
Scan Mode = Stand Modec | |
Scan Mode = Trigger Object Sense c |
a. Recommended scan mode for Gryphon L for hands-free stand mode operation.
b. See "Laser Features" starting on page 5-281 for additional laser programmable timeout options.
c. Not applicable to the Gryphon L.
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout
This feature specifies the time to remain in Trigger Single mode after the trigger is pulled while in Stand Mode.

This timeout is only used when the Scan Mode is configured as Stand Mode.
This feature is valid only for corded models. It is not applicable to the Gryphon L model.
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 0.5 Seconds | ![]() |
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 1.5 Seconds | |
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 2 Seconds | |
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 3 Seconds | |
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 4 Seconds | |
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 6 Seconds |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Stand Detection
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout — continued

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesStand Mode Triggered Timeout = 8 Seconds

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomStand Mode Triggered Timeout = Switch back to Trigger Single on trigger pull
Stand Detection
Specifies the behavior of the scanner when placed in a stand that contains autorecognition hardware.

This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon L.

Switch to Stand Mode

Ignore Autorecognition



Switch to Flashing
Switch to Always On
Stand Mode Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity level for stand mode wakeup. Choices are low, medium and high.

This feature is not applicable to the Gryphon L.
| Stand Mode Sensitivity = Low | |
![]() | ![]() |
![]() |
Scanning Active Time
This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. See page 309 in “References” for descriptions of each feature
Select Scanning Active Time Setting | |
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | ![]() |
DEFAULT
005 = Scanning is active for 5 Seconds

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Flash On Time
Flash On Time
This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See page 310 in "References" for detailed information on setting this feature.

Select Flash ON Time Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
10 = Flash is ON for 1 Second
Flash Off Time
This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See page 311 in "References" for detailed information on setting this feature.

Select Flash OFF Time Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
06 = Flash is OFF for 600ms

Reading Parameters ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Green Spot Duration
Specifies the duration of the good read pointer beam after a good read.
Green Spot Duration = Disable (Green Spot is Off) | |
Green Spot Duration = Short (300 msec) | ![]() |
Green Spot Duration = Medium (500 msec) | |
Green Spot Duration = Long (800 msec) |
CODE SELECTION
The reader supports the following symbologies (barcode types). Symbology-dependent options for each symbology are included in this chapter.
| CODE EAN/UPC on page 109 | STANDARD 2 OF 5 on page 178 |
| • Coupon Control | INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 on page 184 |
| • UPC-A • Code IATA | |
| • UPC-E | DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 on page 191 |
| • EAN 13 (Jan 13) | CODABAR on page 197 |
| • ISSN • ABC Codabar | |
| • EAN 8 (Jan 8) | CODE 11 on page 212 |
| • UPC/EAN Global Settings | GS1 DATABARTM OMNIDIRECTIONAL on page 221 |
| CODE 39 on page 136 | • GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional |
| • Code 32 (ITAL Pharmaceutical Code) | • GS1 DataBarTM Expanded |
| • Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical) | • GS1 DataBarTM Limited |
| CODE 128 on page 151 | CODE 93 on page 229 |
| • GS1-128 | MSI on page 237 |
| CODE ISBT 128 on page 162 | PLESSEY on page 244 |
| CODABLOCK F on page 165 | CODE 4 on page 252 |
| INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) on page 169 | CODE 5 on page 253 |
| • Follett 2 of 5 | |
| • Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR |
Default settings are indicated at each feature/option with a green arrow. Also reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of the most widely used set of standard factory settings. That section also provides space to record any custom settings needed or implemented for your system.
To set most features:
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode at the top of a applicable programming pages.
-
Scan the correct barcode to set the desired programming feature or parameter. You may need to cover unused barcodes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only the barcode you intend to scan.
-
If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the appropriate characters from the keypad.

Additional information about many features can be found in the "References" chapter.
If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Complete the programming sequence b y scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode to exit Programming Mode.
DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES
Use this feature to disable all symbologies.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode below.
- Scan the Disable All Symbologies barcode.
- Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING barcode.

text_image
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
text_image
Disable All Symbologies
This does not disable the reading of programming labels.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Coupon Control
CODE EAN/UPC
Coupon Control
This feature is used to control the reader's method of processing coupon labels.
Coupon Control = Allow all coupon barcodes to be decoded | |
Coupon Control = Enable only UPCA coupon decoding | ![]() |
Coupon Control = Enable only GS1 DataBar ^TM coupon decoding |

Code EAN/UPC ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC-A
The following options apply to the UPC-A symbology.
UPC-A Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-A barcodes.
UPC-A = Disable | |
UPC-A = Enable | ![]() |
UPC-A Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-A barcode data.
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send | |
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Send | ![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Expands UPC-A data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesUPC-A to EAN-13 = Don't Expand
UPC-A to EAN-13 = Expand
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-A number system character.
UPC-A Number System Character = Do not transmit | |
UPC-A Number System Character = Transmit | ![]() |

Code EAN/UPC ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC-A Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-A label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
![]() | UPC-A Minimum Reads = 1 |
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 2 | |
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 3 | |
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 4 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE UPC-E Enable/Disable
UPC-E
The following options apply to the UPC-E symbology.
UPC-E Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-E barcodes.
UPC-E = Disable | |
UPC-E = Enable | ![]() |
UPC-E Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-E barcode data.
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send | |
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Send | ![]() |

UPC-E ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13
Expands UPC-E data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomUPC-E to EAN-13 = Don't Expand
UPC-E to EAN-13 = Expand
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
Expands UPC-E data to the UPC-A data format.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.UPC-E to UPC-A = Don't Expand

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomUPC-E to UPC-A = Expand

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-E system number character.
UPC-E Number System Character = Do not transmit | |
UPC-E Number System Character = Transmit | ![]() |
UPC-E Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-E label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 1 | |
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 2 | ![]() |
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 3 | |
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 4 |
GTIN FORMATTING
This feature enables/disables the ability to convert UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN 8, and EAN 13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format.

If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted GTIN label.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
GTIN Formatting = Disable
text_image
GTIN Formatting = Enable
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE EAN 13 Enable/Disable
EAN 13 (JAN 13)
The following options apply to the EAN 13 (Jan 13) symbology.
EAN 13 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 13/JAN 13 barcodes.
EAN 13 = Disable | |
EAN 13 = Enable | ![]() |
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 13 barcode data.
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send | |
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Send | ![]() |

EAN 13 (Jan 13) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
EAN-13 Flag 1 Character
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN13 Flag1 character. The Flag 1 character is the first character of the label.
EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Don’t transmit | |
EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Transmit | ![]() |
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion
This option enables/disables conversion of EAN 13/JAN 13 Bookland labels starting with 978 to ISBN labels.
![]() | EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable |
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Convert to ISBN |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE EAN 13 Minimum Reads
EAN 13 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN 13 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 1 |
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 2 | |
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 4 |

ISSN ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
ISSN
The following options apply to the ISSN symbology.
ISSN Enable/Disable
Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN13 Bookland labels starting with 977 to ISSN labels.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
ISSN = Enable
text_image
ISSN = Disable
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE EAN 8 Enable/Disable
EAN 8 (JAN 8)
The following options apply to the EAN 8 (Jan 8) symbology.
EAN 8 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 8/JAN 8 barcodes.
EAN 8 = Disable | |
EAN 8 = Enable | ![]() |
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 8 barcode data.
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send | |
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Send | ![]() |

EAN 8 (Jan 8) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13
Enable this option to expand EAN 8/JAN 8 labels to EAN 13/JAN 13.
![]() | ![]() |
![]() |
EAN 8 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN 8 (Jan 8) label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | ![]() |
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE UPC/EAN Decoding Level
UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS
This section provides configuration settings for UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN 13 and EAN 8 symbologies, and affects all of these unless otherwise marked for each feature description.
UPC/EAN Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs.
See page 296 for more information on this feature.
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative) | |
![]() | UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 2 |
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 3 | |
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 4 | |
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive) |

UPC/EAN Global Settings ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
UPC/EAN Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding. This will help the scanner read labels that have spots, voids and/or damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.


text_image
UPC/EAN Correlation = Disable
text_image
UPC/EAN Correlation = EnableUPC/EAN Price Weight Check
This feature enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Price Weight Check = Disabled
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot
text_image
Weight Check = 5-digit price-weight
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Price Weight Check = European 4-digit price-weight check
Price Weight Check = European 5-digit price-weight check

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE In-Store Minimum Reads
In-Store Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an in-store label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
In-store labels are defined as UPC-A labels with a number-system character of 2 or 4 as well as EAN 8 and EAN 13 labels with a Flag1 character of 2 or an EAN 13 label starting with the three characters '980'.
In-Store Minimum Reads = 1 | |
In-Store Minimum Reads = 2 | ![]() |
In-Store Minimum Reads = 3 | |
In-Store Minimum Reads = 4 |
ADD-ONS
Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional and conditional add-ons.
Optional Add-ons
The reader can be enabled to optionally read the following add-ons (supplementals):

If a UPC/EAN base label and an add-on are both decoded, the reader will transmit the base label and add-on. If a UPC/EAN base label is decoded without an add-on, the base label will be transmitted without an add-on. Conditional add-on settings (if enabled) are considered by the reader before optional add-on settings.
![]() | ![]() |
![]() | |
![]() | ![]() |
![]() | |
![]() | ![]() |
![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Optional Add-On Timer
Optional Add-On Timer
This option sets the time the reader will look for an add-on when an add-on fragment has been seen and optional add-ons are enabled. (Also see "Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer" on page 130.)
Optional Add-on Timer = 10ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 20ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 30ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 40ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 50ms |

Add-Ons ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional Add-On Timer — cont.
| Optional Add-on Timer = 60ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 70ms | ![]() |
Optional Add-on Timer = 100ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 120ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 140ms | |
| Optional Add-on Timer = 160ms |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Optional Add-On Timer
Optional Add-On Timer — cont.
Optional Add-on Timer = 180ms | |
| Optional Add-on Timer = 200ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 220ms | |
| Optional Add-on Timer = 240ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 260ms | |
| Optional Add-on Timer = 280ms | |
Optional Add-on Timer = 300ms |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer
This option sets the timer expiration value to read the added part after reading the linear EAN/UPC part. For UPC/EAN add-ons other than those of that type, see "Optional Add-On Timer" on page 127.
![]() | Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = Disable |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 10ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 20ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 30ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 40ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 50ms |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 60ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 70ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 100ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 120ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 140ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 160ms |

Add-Ons ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer — cont.
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 180ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 200ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 220ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 240ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 260ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 280ms | |
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 300ms |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of times a P2 add-on must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1 | |
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2 | ![]() |
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3 | |
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4 |

P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of times a P5 add-on must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
![]() | P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1 |
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2 | |
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3 | |
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of times an GS1-128 add-on must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
![]() | GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1 |
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2 | |
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3 | |
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4 |

CODE 39
The following options apply to the Code 39 symbology.
Code 39 Enable/Disable
Code 39 = Disable | |
Code 39 = Enable | ![]() |
Code 39 Check Character Calculation
Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don't Calculate | |
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Std Check | ![]() |
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Mod 7 Check |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Code 39 Check Character Calculation — cont.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbolsCode 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Italian Post Check

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomCode 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Daimler Chrysler Check
Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 39 barcode data.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the topCode 39 Check Character Transmission = Send

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbolsCode 39 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send

text_image
DEFAULTCode 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission
Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot
text_image
Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = TransmitCode 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don't Transmit
Code 39 Full ASCII
Enables/disables the translation of Code 39 characters to Code 39 full-ASCII characters.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom left.Code 39 Full ASCII = Disable
Code 39 Full ASCII = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Quiet Zones
Code 39 Quiet Zones
This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 39 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a barcode, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side | |
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides | |
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Auto | ![]() |
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides | |
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides |

Code 39 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 39 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 1 | |
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 2 | ![]() |
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 4 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Decoding Level
Code 39 Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 296 for more information on this feature.

This configuration item applies to Code 39 and Code 32.
Code 39 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative) | |
Code 39 Decoding Level = 2 | |
Code 39 Decoding Level = 3 | ![]() |
Code 39 Decoding Level = 4 | |
Code 39 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive) |

Code 39 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 39 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.


text_image
Code 39 Length Control = Variable Length
text_image
Code 39 Length Control = Fixed LengthCode 39 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 39 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. The length can be set from 0 to 50 characters.
Table 2 provides examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 2. Code 39 Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 Characters 07 | Characters 15 Characters | 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 1 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

Select Code 39 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
02 = Length 1 is 2 Characters
Code 39 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 39 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.
Table 3 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 3. Code 39 Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 2 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

Select Code 39Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Interdigit Ratio
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio
This feature specifies the ratio between an intercharacter space and module for Code 39 labels.
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = Disable | |
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 1 | |
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 2 | |
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 3 | |
![]() | Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 4 |
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 5 |

Code 39 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio — cont.
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 6 | |
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 7 | |
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 8 | |
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 9 | |
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 10 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 39 Character Correlation
Code 39 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Code 39 Character Correlation = Disable
text_image
Code 39 Character Correlation = EnableCode 39 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39 barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the reader's software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.
| Code 39 Stitching = Disable | |
Code 39 Stitching = Enable | ![]() |
CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE)
The following options apply to the Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code) symbology.
Code 32 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 32 barcodes.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotCode 32 = Enable

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central barCode 32 = Disable
Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions

The following features are set for Code 32 by using these Code 39 settings:
"Code 39 Quiet Zones" on page 139
"Code 39 Minimum Reads" on page 140
"Code 39 Decoding Level" on page 141
"Code 39 Interdigit Ratio" on page 145
"Code 39 Character Correlation" on page 147
"Code 39 Stitching" on page 147

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 32 Check Char Transmission
Code 32 Check Char Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 32 barcode data.


text_image
Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Send
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission
This option enables/disables transmission of Code 32 start and stop characters.


text_image
Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don't Transmit
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotCode 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL)
The following options apply to the Code 39 CIP symbology.
Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of the reader to decode Code 39 CIP labels.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots
text_image
Barcode image containing encoded digital informationCode 39 CIP = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Enable/Disable
CODE 128
The following options apply to the Code 128 symbology.
Code 128 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 128 barcodes.
Code 128 = Disable | |
Code 128 = Enable | ![]() |
Expand Code 128 to Code 39
This feature enables/disables expansion of Code 128 labels to Code 39 labels.
![]() | Code 128 to Code 39 = Don't Expand |
Code 128 to Code 39 = Expand |
Code 128 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 128 barcode data.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.
text_image
Code 128 Check Character Transmission = SendCode 128 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
Code 128 Function Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Code128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' in the center.
text_image
Code 128 Function Character Transmission = SendCode 128 Function Character Transmission = Don't Send

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission
Enables/disables the transmission of “Sub-Code exchange” characters (NOT transmitted by standard decoding).

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.
text_image
Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission = EnableCode 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission = Disable

Code 128 Quiet Zones
This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 128 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a barcode and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.
Code 128 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones | |
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side | |
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides | |
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Auto | ![]() |
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Minimum Reads
Code 128 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 128 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | Code 128 Minimum Reads = 1 |
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 2 | |
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 4 |

Code 128 Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 296 for more information on this feature.
Code 128 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative) | |
Code 128 Decoding Level = 2 | |
Code 128 Decoding Level = 3 | ![]() |
Code 128 Decoding Level = 4 | |
Code 128 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive) |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Length Control
Code 128 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 128 symbology. See page 296 for more information..

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Code 128 Length Control = Variable Length
text_image
Code 128 Length Control = Fixed LengthCode 128 Set Length 1
Specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 128 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters.
Table 4 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 4. Code 128 Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 01 Character | 07 Characters | 15 Characters | 80 Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 1 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Select Code 128 Set Length 1 Setting| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | ![]() |

text_image
DEFAULT01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 128 Set Length 2
Code 128 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 128 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only.
The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 5 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 5. Code 128 Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 80 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 2 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘0’ and ‘F’ ‘5’ AND 0’ | ||
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

Select Code 128 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
80 = Length 2 is 80 Characters
Code 128 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Code 128 Character Correlation = EnableCode 128 Character Correlation = Disable
Code 128 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Code 128 labels. When parts of a Code 128 barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the reader's software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central barCode 128 Stitching = Disable


ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1-128 Enable
GS1-128
The following options apply to the GS1-128 symbology. (Also known as USS-128, GS1-128, GTIN-128, UCC-128, EAN-128.)
GS1-128 Enable
This option enables/disables the ability of the reader to translate GS1-128 labels to the GS1-128 data format. Options are:
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in Code 128 data format.
• Transmit GS1-128 labels in GS1-128 data format.
- Do not transmit GS1-128 labels.
![]() | GS1-128 = Transmit in Code 128 data format |
![]() | |
GS1-128 = Do not transmit GS1-128 labels |
CODE ISBT 128
The following options apply to the ISBT 128 symbology.
ISBT 128 Concatenation
Use this option to enable/disable ISBT128 concatenation of 2 labels.


text_image
ISBN 128 Concatenation = Disable
text_image
ISBN 128 Concatenation = EnableISBT 128 Force Concatenation
When enabled, this feature forces concatenation for ISBT.

This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenationis enabled.


text_image
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Disable
text_image
ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Enable
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode
ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode
Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.

This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenationis enabled (see page 162).


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dotsISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Dynamic
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
Specifies the timeout used by the ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Mode.
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec | |
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec | |
![]() | ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec |
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec | |
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec | |
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 second |

ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options
To set up pairs of label types for concatenation, use the Datalogic Aladdin configuration application or contact Datalogic Technical Support, as described on page 10.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codablock F Enable/Disable
CODABLOCK F
The following options apply to the Codablock F symbology.
Codablock F Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Codablock F labels.
![]() | Codablock F = Disable |
Codablock F = Enable |
Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables the Codablock F EAN subtype (code with FNC1 in the first position)..
![]() | Codablock F EAN = Disable |
| Codablock F EAN = Enable |
Codablock F AIM Check
Specifies if Check Digit calculation algorithm is AIM compliant or not.
Codablock F AIM Check = Disable | |
Codablock F AIM Check = Enable Check C | ![]() |
Codablock F Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Codablock F symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
![]() | Codablock F Length Control = Variable Length |
Codablock F = Fixed Length |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codablock F Set Length 1
Codablock F Set Length 1
Specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codablock F Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. Characters can be set from 03 to 255 characters.
Table 6 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 6. CODABLOCK F Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 03 Characters 07 | Characters 15 Characters | 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODABLOCK F LENGTH 1 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Three Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’ | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘0”,‘1’ and ‘5’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbolsSelect Codablock F Length 1 Setting
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | CANCEL |
DEFAULT
03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters
Codablock F Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codablock F Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.
Table 7 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 7. CODABLOCK F Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | ||
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODABLOCK F LENGTH 2 SETTING | |||||
| 4 | Scan Three Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘0”,‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘0”,‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.Select Codablock F Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
100 = Length 2 is 100 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5)
The following options apply to the I 2 of 5 symbology.
I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read I 2 of 5 barcodes.
![]() | 12 of 5 = Disable |
12 of 5 = Enable |
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional I 2 of 5 check character.
![]() | 12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable |
12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Standard (Modulo 10) | |
12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check German Parcel |

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation - cont.
| 12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check DHL | |
| 12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Daimler Chrysler | |
| 12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Bosch | |
| 12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Italian Post |
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with I 2 of 5 barcode data.
| 12 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send | |
| 12 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send | DEFAULT |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an 12 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | 12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1 |
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2 | |
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4 |
2 of 5 Decoding Level

This configuration item applies to Interleaved 2 of 5, Datalogic 2 of 5 and Standard 2 of 5.
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 296 for more information on this feature.

text_image
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
text_image
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 2
text_image
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 3

text_image
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
text_image
2 of 5 Decoding Level = 4
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE I 2 of 5 Length Control
12 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the 12 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.


text_image
12 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot12 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length
I 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for 12 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the barcode's check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters in increments of two.
Table 8 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 8.12 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 2 Characters 6 | Characters 14 | Characters 50 | Characters | |
| 2 | Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits | 02 06 14 50 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 4 Scan SELECT I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING | |||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘2’ | ‘0’ and ‘6’ | ‘1’ and ‘4’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

Select 1 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | 2 of 5 Set Length 2
12 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for 12 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the barcode's check and data characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 9 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 9.12 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | Ignore This Length | 4 Characters 14 | Characters 50 Characters | |
| 2 Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits | 00 04 14 50 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 Scan SELECT I 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING | ||||
| 5 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘4’ | ‘1’ and ‘4’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

Select 12 of 5 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.


text_image
12 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable
text_image
I 2 of 5 Character Correlation = DisableI 2 of 5 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a I 2 of 5 barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the reader's software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
12 of 5 Stitching = Enable
text_image
12 of 5 Stitching = Disable
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
FOLLETT 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Follett 2 of 5 symbology.
Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of imager to decode Follett 2 of 5 labels.
![]() | Follett 2 of 5 = Disable |
Follett 2 of 5 = Enable |
INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR
The following options apply to the Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR symbology.
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR labels.
![]() | Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Disable |
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Enable |

Standard 2 of 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
STANDARD 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.
Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Standard 2 of 5 barcodes.


text_image
Standard 2 of 5 = Disable
text_image
Standard 2 of 5 = EnableStandard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.


text_image
2 of 5 Check Character Calculation :
text_image
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send | |
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send | ![]() |
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Standard 2 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1 | |
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2 | ![]() |
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4 |
Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level

The Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level feature is set using "2 of 5 Decoding Level" on page 172.
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbols
text_image
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed LengthStandard 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Standard 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check and data characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters.
Table 10 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 if you want detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 10. Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 01 Character | 07 Characters | 15 Characters | 50 Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
08 = Length 1 is 8 Characters
Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Standard 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 11 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 11. Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 | Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes) | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 3 Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING | |||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
![]() | ![]() |
Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable |
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Standard 2 of 5 barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the reader's software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.
![]() | ![]() |
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable |
INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.
Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Industrial 2 of 5 labels.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Barcode image containing encoded digital informationIndustrial 2 of 5 = Enable
Industrial 2 of 5 = Disable
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotIndustrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotIndustrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an Industrial 2 of 5 check character.
| Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Disable | |
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable | ![]() |
Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
![]() | Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length |
Industrial 2 of 5 = Fixed Length |
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. The length can be set from 0 to 50 characters.
Table 12 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 if you want detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 12. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 Characters | 07 Characters | 15 Characters | 50 Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING | ||||
| 4 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines above and below the barsSelect Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 13 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 13. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | ||
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 3 Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING | |||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Select Industrial 2 of5 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Industrial 2 of 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an Industrial 2 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1 |
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2 | |
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4 |
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables fixed length stitching for Industrial 2 of 5.
![]() | ![]() ![]() |
Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation
Enable/disables character correlation for Industrial 2 of 5.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical bars of varying widthsIndustrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable
CODE IATA
The following options apply to the IATA symbology.
IATA Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables the ability of the reader to decode IATA labels.


text_image
IATA = Enable
text_image
IATA = DisableIATA Check Character Transmission
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.
![]() | |
| IATA Check Character Transmission = Enable | ![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
DATALOGIC 2 OF 5
The following options apply to the Datalogic 2 of 5 symbology.
Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Datalogic 2 of 5 barcodes.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Datalogic 2 of 5 = Disable
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesDatalogic 2 of 5 = Enable
Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Datalogic 2 of 5 check character.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesDatalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

Datalogic 2 of 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an Datalogic 2 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1 | |
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2 | ![]() |
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4 |
Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level

The Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level feature is set using "2 of 5 Decoding Level" on page 172.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Datalogic 2 of 5 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dot
text_image
Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed LengthDatalogic 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the barcode's check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters in increments of two.
Table 14 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 14. Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 2 Characters 6 | Characters 14 | Characters 50 | Characters | |
| 2 | Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits | 02 06 14 50 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 4 Scan SELECT Datalogic 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING | |||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘2’ | ‘0’ and ‘6’ | ‘1’ and ‘4’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

Select Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters
Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the barcode's check and data characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 15 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 15. Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | Ignore This Length | 4 Characters 14 | Characters 50 Characters | |
| 2 Pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits | 00 04 14 50 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 Scan SELECT DATALOGIC 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING | ||||
| 5 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘4’ | ‘1’ and ‘4’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

Select Datalogic 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Datalogic 2 of 5 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.
![]() | 12 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable |
12 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable |
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Datalogic 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Datalogic 2 of 5 barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the reader's software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.
![]() | Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable |
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Enable/Disable
CODABAR
The following options apply to the Codabar symbology.
Codabar Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Codabar barcodes.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central bar
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomCodabar = Enable
Codabar = Disable
Codabar Check Character Calculation
Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small white dot in the centerCodabar Check Character Calculation = Don't Calculate

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable AIM standard check char.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable Modulo 10 check char.
Codabar Check Character Transmission
Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Codabar barcode data.
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Don't Send | |
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Send | ![]() |
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission
Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit | |
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit | ![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Start/Stop Character Set
Codabar Start/Stop Character Set
This option specifies the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.
Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/TN*E | |
Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/ABCD | |
Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/tn*e | |
Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/abcd | ![]() |
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match
When enabled, this option requires that start and stop characters match.
![]() | Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Don't Require Match |
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Require Match |
Codabar Quiet Zones
Specifies the number of quiet zones for Codabar labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a barcode and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.
Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side | |
Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides | |
Codabar Quiet Zones = Auto | ![]() |
Codabar Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides | |
Codabar Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Minimum Reads
Codabar Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Codabar label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | Codabar Minimum Reads = 1 |
Codabar Minimum Reads = 2 | |
Codabar Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Codabar Minimum Reads = 4 |

Codabar Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative, depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 296 for more information on this feature.
Codabar Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative) | |
Codabar Decoding Level = 2 | |
Codabar Decoding Level = 3 | ![]() |
Codabar Decoding Level = 4 | |
Codabar Decoding Level = 5 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Length Control
Codabar Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Codabar symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.


text_image
Codabar Length Control = Variable Length
text_image
Codabar Length Control = Fixed LengthCodabar Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codabar Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's start, stop, check and data characters. The length must include at least one data character. The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters.
Table 16 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 16. Codabar Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 | Desired Setting (and pad with leading zeroes) | 03 Characters | 09 Characters | 15 Characters | 50 Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 1 SETTING | |||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘3’ ‘0’ and ‘9’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ | |||
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

Select Codabar Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Set Length 2
Codabar Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Codabar Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the barcode's start, stop, check and data characters. The length must include at least one data character.
The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 17 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 17. Codabar Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 | Desired Setting (and pad with leading zeroes) | 00 Ignore This Length | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 2 SETTING | |||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

Select Codabar Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Codabar Interdigit Ratio
This feature specifies the ratio between an intercharacter space and module for Codabar labels.
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = Disable | |
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 1 | |
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 2 | |
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 3 | |
![]() | Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 4 |
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 5 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Codabar Interdigit Ratio
Codabar Interdigit Ratio — cont.
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 6 | |
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 7 | |
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 8 | |
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 9 | |
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 10 |
Codabar Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Codabar Character Correlation = EnableCodabar Character Correlation = Disable
Codabar Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the reader's software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central vertical barCodabar Stitching = Disable
Codabar Stitching = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ABC Codabar Enable/Disable
ABC CODABAR
The following options apply to the ABC Codabar symbology.
ABC Codabar Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode ABC Codabar labels.
![]() | ABC Codabar = Disable |
ABC Codabar = Enable |
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode
Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.
![]() | ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Static |
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Dynamic |
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout
Specifies the timeout in 10-millisecond ticks used by the ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Mode.
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec | |
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec | |
![]() | ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec |
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec | |
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec | |
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 Second |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE ABC Codabar Force Concatenation
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation
Forces labels starting or ending with D to be concatenated.
![]() | ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Disable |
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Enable |

CODE 11
The following options apply to the Code 11 symbology.
Code 11 Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read Code 11 barcodes.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomCode 11 = Enable
Code 11 = Disable
Code 11 Check Character Calculation
This option enables/disables calculation and verification of optional Code 11 check character.
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Disable | |
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C | |
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check K | |
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C and K | ![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 11 Check Character Transmission
Code 11 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 11 check character.
Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send | |
Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Send | ![]() |
Code 11 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 11 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 1 | |
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 2 | ![]() |
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 4 |

Code 11 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 11 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.


text_image
Code 11 Length Control = Variable Length
text_image
Code 11 Length Control = Fixed Length
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 11 Set Length 1
Code 11 Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 11 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters.
Table 18 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 18. Code 11 Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 | Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes) | 02 Characters 07 | Characters 15 Characters | 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 1 SETTING | |||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ | |||
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

Select Code 11 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
04 = Length 1 is 4 Characters
Code 11 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 11 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check and data characters.
The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 19 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 19. Code 11 Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 | Desired Setting (pad with leading zeroes) | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 2 SETTING | |||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘0’ and ‘F’ | ‘3’ AND 2’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||

Select Code 11 Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 11 Interdigit Ratio
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio
This feature specifies the ratio between an intercharacter space and module for Code 11 labels.
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = Disable | |
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 1 | |
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 2 | |
Code11 Interdigit Ratio = 3 | |
![]() | Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 4 |
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 5 |

Code 11 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio — cont.
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 6 | |
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 7 | |
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 8 | |
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 9 | |
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 10 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 11 Decoding Level
Code 11 Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 296 for more information on this feature.
Codabar Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative) | |
Codabar Decoding Level = 2 | |
Codabar Decoding Level = 3 | ![]() |
Codabar Decoding Level = 4 | |
Codabar Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive) |

Code 11 Character Correlation
When correlation is enabled, the barcode reader will combine label data from multiple scans when decoding. Enabling correlation will help the scanner read labels that have some spots and/or voids. It may also help read labels that have damaged areas. Enabling correlation will also increase the chances that a label will be read incorrectly.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.
text_image
Code 11 Character Correlation = EnableCode 11 Character Correlation = Disable
Code 11 Stitching
This option enables/disables stitching for Code 11 labels. When parts of a Code 11 barcode are presented to the reader with this feature enabled, the barcode parts will be assembled by the reader's software, and the data will be decoded if all barcode proofing requirements are met.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Code 11 Stitching = Disable
Code 11 Stitching = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable
GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar ^TM Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14) symbology.
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar ^TM Omnidirectional barcodes.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Disable
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Enable
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar ^TM Omnidirectional barcodes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotGS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation = Disable

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom right.GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a GS1 DataBar ^TM
Omnidirectional label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 1 |
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 2 | |
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 3 | |
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 4 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable
GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar ^TM Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded) symbology.
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar ^TM Expanded barcodes.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Disable
text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = EnableGS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar ^™ Expanded barcodes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Disable
text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = EnableGS1 DataBar™ Expanded Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a GS1 DataBar ^™ Expanded label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 1 |
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 2 | |
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 3 | |
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 4 |
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the GS1 DataBar ^TM Expanded symbology.
Variable Length. For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbolsGS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Fixed Length
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Variable Length
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 74 characters.
Table 20 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 20. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 01 Character | 07 Characters | 52 Characters | 74 Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT GS1 DataBarTM EXPANDED LENGTH 1SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘5’ and ‘2’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
Select GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Set Length 1 Setting | |
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | CANCEL |
DEFAULT
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 74 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 21 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 21. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 (ignore second length) | 07 Characters 52 | Characters 74 Characters | Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT GS1 DataBarTM EXPANDED LENGTH 2 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘5’ and ‘2’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
74 = Length 2 is 74 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable
GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED
The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar ^™ Limited (formerly RSS Limited) symbology.
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable
When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar ^TM Limited barcodes.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Disable
text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Limited = EnableGS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation
When enabled, GS1 DataBar ^™ Limited barcodes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.


text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Disable
text_image
GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Enable
GS1 DataBar™ Limited ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
GS1 DataBar™ Limited Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a GS1 DataBar ^™ Limited label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 1 |
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 2 | |
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 3 | |
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 4 |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 93 Enable/Disable
CODE 93
The following options apply to the Code 93 symbology.
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Code 93 labels.
![]() | Code 93 = Disable |
Code 93 = Enable |
Code 93 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 93 check character.
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Disable | |
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C | |
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check K | |
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C and K | ![]() |
Code 93 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 93 check character.
Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Disable | |
Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Enable | ![]() |
Code 93 Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 93 symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
![]() | Code 93 Length Control = Variable Length |
Code 93 = Fixed Length |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 93 Set Length 1
Code 93 Set Length 1
Specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 93 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters.
Table 22 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 22. Code 93 Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 01 Characters 07 | Characters 15 Characters | 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 1 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters FromAppendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the center.Select Code 93 Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
Code 93 Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Code 93 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 23 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 23. CODE 93 Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 2 SETTING | ||||
| 4 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a horizontal bar at the bottomSelect Code 93 Length 2 Setting

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 93 Minimum Reads
Code 93 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 93 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | Code 93 Minimum Reads = 1 |
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 2 | |
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 4 |

Code 93 Decoding Level
Specifies the decoding level for Code 93. Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 296 for more information on this feature.
Code 93 Decoding Level = Disable | |
Code 93 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative) | |
Code 93 Decoding Level = 2 | |
Code 93 Decoding Level = 3 | ![]() |
Code 93 Decoding Level = 4 | |
Code 93 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive) |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 93 Quiet Zones
Code 93 Quiet Zones
Enables/disables quiet zones for Code 93.
Code 93 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones | |
| Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side | |
| Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides | |
| Code 93 Quiet Zones = Auto | DEFAULT |
| Code 93 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides |

Code 93 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 93 Stitching
Disable/enable fixed or variable length stitching for Code 93.
Code 93 Stitching = Disable | |
Code 93 Stitching = Enable | ![]() |
Code 93 Character Correlation
Enables/disables Character Correlation for Code 93.
Code 93 Character Correlation = Disable | |
Code 93 Character Correlation = Enable | ![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE MSI Enable/Disable
MSI
The following options apply to the MSI symbology.
MSI Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode MSI labels.
![]() | MSI = Disable |
MSI = Enable |
MSI Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional MSI check character.
MSI Check Character Calculation = Disable | |
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10 | ![]() |
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod11/10 | |
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10/10 |
MSI Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.
MSI Check Character Transmission = Disable | |
MSI Check Character Transmission = Enable | ![]() |
MSI Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the MSI symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
![]() | MSI Length Control = Variable Length |
MSI = Fixed Length |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE MSI Set Length 1
MSI Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for MSI Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters.
Table 24 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 24. MSI Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 01 Characters 07 | Characters 15 Characters | 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 1 SETTING | ||||
| 4 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central dotSelect MSI Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
MSI Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for MSI Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 25 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 25. MSI Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 2 SETTING | ||||
| 4 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘5’ AND ‘0’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dotsSelect MSI Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE MSI Minimum Reads
MSI Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an MSI label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
MSI Minimum Reads = 1 | |
MSI Minimum Reads = 2 | |
MSI Minimum Reads = 3 | |
MSI Minimum Reads = 4 | ![]() |

MSI Decoding Level
Specifies the decoding level for MSI. Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 296 for more information on this feature.
MSI Decoding Level = Disable | |
MSI Decoding Level = 1 (conservative) | |
MSI Decoding Level = 2 | |
MSI Decoding Level = 3 | ![]() |
MSI Decoding Level = 4 | |
MSI Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive) |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE MSI Stitching
MSI Stitching
Enables/disables fixed length stitching for MSI.
![]() | MSI Stitching = Disable |
MSI Stitching = Enable |
MSI Character Correlation
Enables/disables Character Correlation for MSI.
![]() | MSI Character Correlation = Disable |
MSI Character Correlation = Enable |

Plessey ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
PLESSEY
The following options apply to the Plessey symbology.
Plessey Enable/Disable
Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Plessey = Enable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Plessey Check Character Calculation
Plessey Check Character Calculation
Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Plessey check character.
| Plessey Check Character Calculation = Disable | |
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Plessey std. check char. verification | ![]() |
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Anker check char. verification | |
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Plessey std. and Anker check char verification |
Plessey Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.
| Plessey Check Character Transmission = Disable | |
Plessey Check Character Transmission = Enable | ![]() |

Plessey ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Length Control
This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Plessey symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the top
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesPlessey Length Control = Variable Length
Plessey = Fixed Length

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Plessey Set Length 1
Plessey Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Plessey Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters.
Table 26 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 296 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 26. Plessey Length 1 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 01 Characters 07 | Characters 15 Characters | 50 Characters | |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT Plessey LENGTH 1 SETTING | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters FromAppendix D, Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘0’ and ‘7’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dotsSelect Plessey Set Length 1 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
01 = Length 1 is 1 Character
Plessey Set Length 2
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Plessey Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters.
The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Table 27 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 297 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.
Table 27. Plessey Length 2 Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 00 (Ignore This Length) | 07 Characters 15 | Characters 50 Characters | Characters |
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SELECT PLESSEY LENGTH 2 SETTING | ||||
| 4 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D, Keypad | '0' and '0' | '0' and '7' | '1' and '5' | '5' AND '0' |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and repeating patternsSelect Plessey Length 2 Setting
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Plessey Minimum Reads
Plessey Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Plessey label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
Plessey Minimum Reads = 1 | |
Plessey Minimum Reads = 2 | |
Plessey Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Plessey Minimum Reads = 4 | ![]() |

Plessey ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Plessey Decoding Level
Specifies the decoding level for Plessey. Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 296 for more information on this feature.
Plessey Decoding Level = Disable | |
Plessey Decoding Level = 1 (conservative) | |
Plessey Decoding Level = 2 | |
Plessey Decoding Level = 3 | ![]() |
Plessey Decoding Level = 4 | |
Plessey Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive) |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Plessey Stitching
Plessey Stitching
Enables/disables fixed length stitching for Plessey.
![]() | Plessey Stitching = Disable |
Plessey Stitching = Enable |
Plessey Character Correlation
Enables/disables Character Correlation for Plessey.
![]() | Plessey Character Correlation = Disable |
Plessey Character Correlation = Enable |

Code 4 ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
CODE 4
The following options apply to the Code 4 symbology.
Enables/Disables ability of imager to decode Code 4 labels.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and dots, no readable text or symbolsCode 4 = Enable
Code 4 = Disable
Code 4 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 4 check character.
Code 4 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send | |
Code 4 Check Character Transmission = Send | ![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion
Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion
This feature enables/disables the conversion of hexadecimal label data to decimal label data.
![]() | |
![]() | ![]() |
CODE 5
The following options apply to the Code 5 symbology.
Enables/Disables ability of imager to decode Code 5 labels.
![]() | ![]() |
| Code 5 = Enable |
Code 5 Check Character Transmission
This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 5 check character.
| Code 5 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send | |
![]() | ![]() |
Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion
This feature enables/disables the conversion of hexadecimal label data to decimal label data.
| Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion = Disable | |
![]() | ![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level
CODE 4 AND CODE 5 COMMON CONFIGURATION ITEMS
The following options apply to both Code 4 and Code 5 symbologies.
Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs. See page 285 for more information on this feature.

This configuration item applies to Code 4 and Code 5.
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 1 (conservative) | |
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 2 | |
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 3 | ![]() |
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 4 | |
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive) |

Code 4 and Code 5 Common Configuration Items ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads
This feature specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 4 or Code 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as good read.
![]() | Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 1 |
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 2 | |
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 3 | |
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 4 |
Chapter 4
Wireless Features

The features in this section are valid only for the GM4100 and GBT4100 models.
This section provides options and programming related to the reader's STAR and Bluetooth communication features. Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.
The following features are valid for both STAR and Bluetooth Wireless models:
| WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES starting on page 258 | CONFIGURATION UPDATES starting on page 263 |
| • Good Transmission Beep | • Automatic Configuration Update |
| • Beep Frequency | • Copy Configuration to Scanner |
| • Beep Duration | • Copy Configuration to Base Station |
| • Beep Volume | • Automatic Flash Update |
| • Disconnect Beep | • Request Flash Update |
| • Base Station Beep | POWERDOWN TIMEOUT starting on page 265 |
| • Leash Alarm | BATCH FEATURES starting on page 267 |
| • Batch Mode | |
| RF ADDRESS STAMPING starting on page 269 | • Send Batch |
| • Source Radio Address Transmission | • Erase Batch Memory |
| • Source Radio Address Delimiter Character | • RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay |
• FEATURES FOR STAR MODELS ONLY starting on page 270
- BLUETOOTH-ONLY FEATURES starting on page 277

Wireless Beeper Features ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES
Several options are available to configure beeper behavior for RF operation.
Good Transmission Beep
Enables/disables the Good Transmission Beep indication. When enabled, a beep occurs when a Label is correctly transmitted to the base.
Good Transmission Beep = Disable | |
Good Transmission Beep = Enable | ![]() |
Beep Frequency
Adjusts radio-specific beep indications to sound at a low, medium or high frequency, selectable from the list below. (Controls the beeper's pitch/tone.)
![]() | Beep Frequency = Low |
Beep Frequency = Medium | |
Beep Frequency = High |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Beep Duration
Beep Duration
This feature controls the duration of radio-specific beep indications.
Beep Duration = 60 msec | |
Beep Duration = 80 msec | ![]() |
Beep Duration = 100 msec | |
Beep Duration = 120 msec | |
Beep Duration = 140 msec | |
Beep Duration = 160 msec | |
Beep Duration = 180 msec | |
Beep Duration = 200 msec |
Beep Duration = 60 msec
Beep Duration = 180 msec

Wireless Beeper Features ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume (loudness) of radio-specific beep indications. There are three selectable volume levels.
Beep Volume = Low | |
Beep Volume = Medium | |
Beep Volume = High | ![]() |
Disconnect Beep
Enables/disables the beep indication that a handheld has become connected or disconnected from a Base Station.

The defaults are different for the STAR and BT models.


text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sides

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Base Station Beep
Base Station Beep
Enables/disables a beep indication when the handheld is placed in the Base Station.
BT Base Station Beep = Disable | |
BT Base Station Beep = Enable | ![]() |
Leash Alarm
This setting specifies the number of seconds to sound the Leash Mode beeps (three per second) when the handheld goes out of range. This is especially useful in instances where the reader might inadvertently have been placed in a bag or cart.
For this mode to be effective, reader must be linked to the Base Station and Sleep Mode Timeout on page 94 must be disabled. If the reader is asleep or disconnected from the Base Station, there is no way for it to know where it is relative to the Base Station because communication is not active between the devices.
![]() | Leash Alarm = Disabled |
Leash Alarm = 1 Second | |
Leash Alarm = 2 Seconds |

Wireless Beeper Features ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Leash Alarm — cont.
Leash Alarm = 3 Seconds | |
Leash Alarm = 4 Seconds | |
Leash Alarm = 5 Seconds | |
Leash Alarm = 10 Seconds | |
Leash Alarm = 25 Seconds | |
Leash Alarm = 30 Seconds |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Automatic Configuration Update
See page 312 in “References” for detailed information and examples of these features.
Automatic Configuration Update
When this feature is enabled, a reader and its linked Base Station can automatically ensure they stay in sync with regard to application hardware and/or configuration. See page 312 for more information on this feature.
Automatic Configuration Update = Disable | |
Automatic Configuration Update = Enable | ![]() |
Copy Configuration to Scanner
Scan the following label to copy the current Base Station configuration to the scanner. Use this method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time configuration update to be performed on the scanner.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this barcode.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesCopy Configuration to Scanner
Copy Configuration to Base Station
Scan the following label to copy the current scanner configuration to the Base Station. Use this method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time configuration update to be performed on the Base Station.

Copy Configuration to Base Station

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label with this barcode.
Automatic Flash Update
This feature enables/disables the automatic flash update of a reader.

This item is valid only with POS version of Base Station (model 4010).

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottom
text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number 'n' in the bottom right corner.Automatic Flash Update = Enable
Automatic Flash Update = Disable

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Request Flash Update
Request Flash Update
Scan this barcode to request a flash update from a Base Station

NOTE
Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunct with this barcode.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines on both sidesRequest Flash Update
Powerdown Timeout
The Powerdown Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the unit off when the imager has been idle.
Powerdown Timeout = Disable | |
Powerdown Timeout = 10 minutes | |
Powerdown Timeout = 20 minutes | |
Powerdown Timeout = 40 minutes |

Configuration Updates ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Powerdown Timeout — continued
Powerdown Timeout = 60 Minutes (1 Hour) | ![]() |
Powerdown Timeout = 120 Minutes (2 Hours) | |
Powerdown Timeout = 4 Hours | |
Powerdown Timeout = 6 Hours | |
Powerdown Timeout = 8 Hours | |
Powerdown Timeout = 16 Hours | |
Powerdown Timeout = 24 Hours |
BATCH FEATURES
Batch Mode
This option specifies whether to store labels in the handheld while disconnected from the base. Options are as follows:
- Disabled — The handheld will not store/batch labels.
- Automatic — The handheld will store labels to RAM when the handheld goes out of range and is disconnected from the remote device.
- Manual — The handheld will always store labels to Flash memory. The user must manually send the stored labels to the remote device using a special "batch send" label.


text_image
Batch Mode = Disabled
text_image
Batch Mode = Automatic
text_image
Batch Mode = ManualSend Batch
Use this barcode to initiate sending of labels stored in batch memory.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this barcode.

text_image
Send BatchErase Batch Memory
Use this barcode to erase any labels stored in batch memory.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunction with this barcode.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and patternsErase Batch Memory
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay
Specifies the delay in 10 msec increments between transmitting labels stored in batch memory.
![]() | ![]() |
![]() | |
![]() | |
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 0.5 seconds | |
RF and | |
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 2.5 seconds |
RF ADDRESS STAMPING
These features allow configuration of source radio data inclusion.
Source Radio Address Transmission
Enables/disables the ability of source radio address information to be transmitted to the host and, if so, at what position with respect to the label data. See page 312 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

When included as a prefix, the source-radio ID is displayed after all label formatting has been applied. The 6 byte hex address is sent as 12 ascii characters, i.e., an address of 00 06 66 00 1A ED will be sent as (shown in hex): 30 30 30 36 36 36 30 30 31 41 45 44


text_image
Source Radio Address Transmission = Do Not Include
text_image
Source Radio Address Transmission = PrefixSource Radio Address Delimiter Character
This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio address when address stamping is enabled.

This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on page 269 is enabled.

Set Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
00 = No Delimiter Character
Features for Star Models Only
The features in this section are valid only for the Gryphon I GM4100 Star model:
• STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
• STAR Radio Transmit Mode
DISPLAY FEATURES starting on page 272
- Contrast
- Font Size
- Backlight
- Display Mode
- Display Timeout
- Keypad Select
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and Base Station is considered failed.
When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds. See page 314 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

Set Radio Protocol Timeout
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
02 = 2 Seconds Radio Protocol Timeout
STAR Radio Transmit Mode
Specifies the transmission protocol for Star communications.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE STAR Radio Transmit Mode
Options are:
- ACK from cradle to scanner — signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station receives a label
- ACK when sent to host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent the label to the host
- ACK from host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent the label to the host and host has replied with an acknowledge message.

text_image
DEFAULT

ACK when sent to host

ACK from host

ACK from host works only for RS232 or USB-COM interfaces with ACK/NACK disabled. If ACK from host is configured with any other interface conditions, it works like ACK when sent to host.
See "Message Formatting" on page 317 for details.
DISPLAY FEATURES
Contrast
Read the code until the desired contrast is reached.
![]() | |
![]() |
Font Size
![]() | ![]() |
![]() | |
![]() |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Backlight
Backlight
![]() | Display backlight = off |
Display backlight = on |
Display Mode
The user can control the reader display behavior according to various selections. See page 312 in "References" for detailed information about each feature.
![]() | Local Echo mode |
Normal mode | |
Clear display after decode |
Display Timeout
Specifies how long the display will remain on after a display write. Display is forced on after any display write or after any reading phase. Display and backlight are turned off after this timeout expires.
Display Timeout = Disable | ![]() |
Display Timeout = 1 Second | |
Display Timeout = 2 Seconds | |
Display Timeout = 3 Seconds | |
Display Timeout = 4 Seconds |

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Display Timeout
Display Timeout - cont.
Display Timeout = 5 Seconds | |
Display Timeout= 6 Seconds | |
Display Timeout = 7 Seconds | |
Display Timeout = 8 Seconds | |
Display Timeout = 9 Seconds | |
Display Timeout = 9.9 Seconds (9,900ms max.) |
Keypad Select
This parameter specifies the character that has to be sent from the scanner when one of the three keys are pressed. For example, when key1 is pressed a 0x3C '<' character is sent.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
- Determine the desired setting.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: DISPLAY KEYPAD SELECT.
- Then read 3 HEX characters in the range 01-FE from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, corresponding to the left, center and right keys respectively.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
Disable Keypad | |
Enable Keypad Select | |
| Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. | CANCEL |
Disable Keypad

text_image
DEFAULTCANCEL
3C3D3E
Bluetooth-Only Features
The features in this section are valid only for Gryphon Bluetooth models. Also reference the Setup section for instructions on Linking a BT Reader to a PC, starting on page 25.
BT SECURITY FEATURES
- BT Security Mode
- BT Pin Code
OTHER BT FEATURES
- BT Poll Rate
BT SECURITY FEATURES
These features enable/disable the BT system to require a configurable pin code to authenticate/connect the BT devices, and encrypt the data.
BT Security Mode
This feature enables/disables authentication and encryption of the BT link. Use the feature "BT Pin Code" on page 278 to specify the pin code used to authenticate the BT Link.

NOTE
Changing the security mode setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled setting, the Security Mode setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin. After the Base Station has been updated the devices must be relinked.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
BT Security Mode = Disable
text_image
BT Security Mode = Enable
BT Security Features ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
BT Pin Code
This option specifies the 4-character pin code to be used for authentication of the B'T link. "B'T Security Mode" on page 277 must first be enabled to require the pin code.
See page 315 for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small number '1' at the bottomSelect BT Pin Code
Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

CANCEL
DEFAULT
31323334 = Default Pin Code is 1234

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE BT Poll Rate
OTHER BT FEATURES
BT Poll Rate
This feature specifies the time between BT polls.
BT Poll Rate = Maximum BT Poll Rate | |
BT Poll Rate = 10 ms | |
BT Poll Rate = 20 ms | ![]() |
BT Poll Rate = 30 ms | |
BT Poll Rate = 50 ms | |
BT Poll Rate = 100 ms |

Other BT Features ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
BT Poll Rate (continued)
BT Poll Rate = 150 ms | |
BT Poll Rate = 200 ms | |
BT Poll Rate = 500 ms | |
BT Poll Rate = 990 ms |
Chapter 5
Laser Features
The features in this section are valid for the Gryphon L GD4300 model only.
LASER SCAN ANGLE on page 282
LASER IDLE MODE on page 282
BI-DIRECTIONAL READ DECODING on page 283
ALWAYS ON SCAN MODE TIMEOUT on page 284
This section provides options and programming related to the reader's laser features. Reference Appendix B, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.

For hands-free or stand operations, it is recommended that Flashing scan mode be used. See "Scan Mode" on page 101 for programming labels for this feature. For more information, go to page 308 in "References".
Laser Scan Angle
This feature sets the scan angle for the laser. The Narrow scan angle is helpful for selecting and reading a specific barcode among a tight grouping of labels.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Laser Scan Angle = Normal (47 degrees)
text_image
Laser Scan Angle = Narrow (35 degreesLaser Idle Mode
Laser Idle Mode option is applicable for; trigger Single, Trigger Hold Multiple & Trigger Pulse Multiple only.
This configuration provides control over the laser scanning motor when the laser is not actively scanning. The options are:
Dither Disable: Shuts down the motor (laser mirror dithering) during laser engine idle time to reduce overall scanner power consumption.
Dither Enable: Allows the laser engine motor to continue dithering when laser is not active; may provide an improved read response time.

text_image
DEFAULT
text_image
Dither Disable
text_image
Dither Enable
ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE Bi-Directional Read Decoding
Bi-Directional Read Decoding
This configuration provides control over the good read and barcode label requirement. This programming option for Gyphon Laser affects all barcode symbologies.
Bi-Directional Read Disable: When Bi-directional reading is disabled, the laser scan is only required to obtain a valid label read in one scanning direction.
Bi-Directional Read Enable: When enabled, the reader is must obtain a valid good read in both scanning directions as part of the label read/decode process. Enabled will provide increased decode reliability.
Bi-Directional Read Disable | |
Bi-Directional Read Enable | ![]() |

Laser Features ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE
Always On Scan Mode Timeout
When the Gryphon Laser is in Always On scanning mode, timeout periods can be configured. If the programmed Always On Timeout elapses, the reader will shut down and a trigger pull is required to resume operation.
Always On Timeout: 1 Hour | |
Always On Timeout: 2 Hours | |
Always On Timeout: 3 Hours | |
Always On Timeout: 4 Hours | |
![]() | Always On Timeout: 5 Hours |
Chapter 6 References
This section contains explanations and examples of selected barcode features. See the Configuration section for the actual barcode labels used to configure the reader.
RS-232 Parameters
RS-232 Only
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the reader's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. With an improper baud rate setting, data may not reach the host correctly.
Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements.
Parity
This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host device requirements.
- Select None when no parity bit is required.
- Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
- Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character.
Handshaking Control
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). Handshaking Control includes the following options:
- RTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored.
-
RTS/CTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions.
-
RTS/XON/XOFF — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. XON and XOFF gate transmissions.
- RTS On/CTS — RTS is always asserted. CTS gates transmissions.
RTS/CTS Scan Control — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions and controls enable and disable state of scanner.
RS-232/USB COM Parameters
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.
To set the delay:
- Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
- Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Go to page 47 and scan the barcode: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit.
This completes the procedure. See Table 28 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 28. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 50ms 150ms | 600ms 850ms | ||
| 2 Divide by 10 (pad with leading zeroes to yield two-digits) | 05 15 60 | 85 | ||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING | ||||
| 5 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | '0' and '5' | '5' and '0' | '6' and '0' | '8' and '5' |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
ACK NAK Options
This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/NAK protocol. When configured, the reader and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is in error.
Options are:
• D i s a b l e
- Enable for label transmission — The reader expects an ACK/NAK response from the host when a label is sent.
- Enable for host-command acknowledge — The reader will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command.
- Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge
ACK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host mands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bitshas been set as 7 Data Bits.
- Determine the desired character or value.
- Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character/value.
- Go to page 50 and scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will cause a two-beep indication.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit.
See Table 29 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 29. ACK Character Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Character/Value2 | Hex equivalent from ASCII Chart | ACK $0x06 | @0x24 | >0x40 | 0x3E |
| 3 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 | Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING | ||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters from Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘6’ | ‘2’ and ‘4’ | ‘4’ and ‘0’ | ‘3’ AND ‘E’ |
| 6 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
NAK Character
This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.
To set this feature:
- Determine the desired character or value.
- Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character/value.
- Go to page 50 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will cause a two-beep indication.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 30 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 30. NAK Character Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Character/Value2 | Hex equivalent from ASCII Chart | NAK $ @ >0x15 0x24 0x40 0x3E | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 4 | Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING | ||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘2’ and ‘4’ | ‘4’ and ‘0’ | ‘3’ AND ‘E’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
ACK NAK Timeout Value
This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout.
To set this value:
-
Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
-
Divide the desired setting by 200 (setting is in 200ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
- Go to page 51 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 31 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 31. ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 200ms | 1,000ms (1 sec.) | 5200ms (5.2 sec.) | 15,000ms (15 sec.) |
| 2 Divide by 200 | 01 05 26 75 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 Scan SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING | ||||
| 5 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘0’ and ‘5’ | ‘2’ and ‘6’ | ‘7’ and ‘5’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
ACK NAK Retry Count
This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries.
To set this feature:
- Determine the desired setting.
- Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20 = 020, etc.
- Go to page 51 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
-
Scan the barcode: SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING.
-
Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the number which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 32 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 32. ACK NAK Retry Count Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | Disable Retry Count | 3 Retries 54 Retries Unlimited Retries | ||
| 2 Pad with leading zero(es) | 000 003 054 255 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 Scan SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING | ||||
| 5 Scan Three Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’ | ‘0’, ‘5’ and ‘4’ | ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
Disable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.
To set the value:
- Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Disable Character is not used (not available).
- Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character/value.
- Go to page 53 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will cause a two-beep indication.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 33 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 33. Disable Character Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired character/value2 | Hex equivalent from ASCII Chart | ‘d’ ’D’0x64 0x7D | 0x44 0xFF | Disable Command Not Used | |
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 4 Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING | |||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘6’ and ‘4’ ‘7’ and ‘D’ ‘4’ and ‘4’ | ‘F’ AND ‘F’ | ||
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
Enable Character
Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader.
ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected.

Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.
To set this feature:
Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Enable Character is not used (not available).
- Determine the desired character or value.
- Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character/value.
- Go to page 53 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate two alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 2 above. The second character will cause a two-beep indication.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 34 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 34. Enable Character Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired character/value2 | Hex equivalent from ASCII Chart | ‘e’ }’ ‘E’0x65 0x7D | 0x45 0xFF | Enable Command Not Used | |
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 4 Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING | |||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘6’ and ‘5’ | ‘7’ and ‘D’ | ‘4’ and ‘5’ | ‘F’ AND ‘F’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
Keyboard Interface
Wedge Quiet Interval
Specifies the amount of time the reader looks for keyboard activity before it breaks the keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The range is from 0 to 990ms in 10ms increments.

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.
- Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
- Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00 , 5 = 05 , 20 = 20 , etc.
-
Go to page 61 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Prog. Mode.
-
Scan the barcode: SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING.
-
Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit.
This completes the procedure to set the Wedge Quiet Interval. See Table 35 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 35. Wedge Quiet Interval Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 10ms 150ms | 600ms 850ms | ||
| 2 Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes) | 01 15 60 85 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 Scan SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING | ||||
| 5 Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘6’ and ‘0’ | ‘8’ and ‘5’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
Intercharacter Delay
This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.
To set the delay:
-
Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
-
Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
-
Go to page 62 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
-
Scan the barcode: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.
-
Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 28 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 36. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 50ms 150ms | 600ms 850ms | |||
| 2 | Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two-digits) | 05 15 60 85 | |||
| 3 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 | Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING | ||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters FromAppendix D Kcypad | ‘0’ and ‘5’ | ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘6’ and ‘0’ | ‘8’ and ‘5’ |
| 6 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
Intercode Delay
Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
- Determine the desired setting.
- Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc
- Go to page 63 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 46 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 37. Wedge Intercode Delay Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | No Delay | 5 Seconds | 60 Seconds | 99 Seconds |
| 2 Pad with leading zero(es) | 00 05 60 99 | |||
| 3 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||
| 4 | Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING | |||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters FromAppendix D Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’ and ‘5’ | ‘6’ and ‘0’ |
| 6 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||
Symbologies
Decoding Level
Decoding Levels are used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer's needs.
- Level 1 results in a very conservative decoder at the expense of not being able to read poorly printed or damaged labels.
- Level 5 results in a very aggressive decoder. This aggressive behavior allows decoding of poorly printed and damaged labels at the expense of increasing the likelihood of decoding errors.
- Level 3, which is the default setting, allows the majority of product labels to be decoded.
There are many factors that determine when to change the decoding level for a particular symbology. These factors include spots, voids, non-uniform bar/space widths, damaged labels, etc. that may be experienced in some barcode labels. If there are many hard to read or damaged labels that cannot be decoded using a conservative setting, increase the decoding level to be more aggressive. If the majority of labels are very good quality labels, or there is a need to decrease the possibility of a decoder error, lower the decoding level to a more conservative level.
Set Length
Length Control allows you to select either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the specified symbology.
Variable Length. For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.
Fixed Length. For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.
Set Length 1
This feature specifies one of the barcode lengths for Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the barcode's data characters only.
The number of characters that can be set varies, depending on the symbology. Reference the page for your selected symbology to see specific variables.
- Determine the desired character length (varies depending on symbology). Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
- Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode to SELECT LENGTH 1 SET TING for your selected symbology.
- Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Prog Mode.
Set Length 2
This feature allows you to set one of the barcode lengths for the specified symbology. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. See the page for the specific symbology for parameters.
The length that can be set varies depending on the symbology. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length).
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
- Determine the desired character length (from 1 to 50 — or 0 to ignore this length). Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
- Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode to SELECT LENGTH 2 SET TING for your selected symbology.
- Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad that represent the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake, before the last character scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure.
Data Editing

CAUTION
It is not recommended to use these features with IBM interfaces.
When a barcode is scanned, additional information can be sent to the host computer along with the barcode data. This combination of barcode data and supplementary user-defined data is called a “message string.” The Data Editing features can be used to build specific user-defined data into a message string.
There are several types of selectable data characters that can be sent before and after scanned data. You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or only with specific symbologies. Figure 16 shows the available elements you can add to a message string:
Figure 16. Breakdown of a Message String

flowchart
graph TD
A["Label ID Transmission: Enable this option to transmit the Label ID you configure for the scanned symbology."] --> B["OR..."]
C["Prefix"] --> D["Label ID"]
E["AIM ID"] --> F["Bar Code Data"]
G["Label ID"] --> H["Suffix"]
I["AIM ID: This function is used to identify and display the common label identifier for its symbology. When enabled, this ID code will be transmitted before the scanned bar code data."] --> J["00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)"]

Additional advanced editing is available. See the Advanced formatting features in the Datalogic Aladdin configuration software, or contact Technical Support (described on page 10 for more information.
Please Keep In Mind...
- Modifying a message string is not a mandatory requirement. Data editing is a sophisticated feature allowing highly customizable output for advanced users. Factory default settings for data editing is typically set to NONE.
- A prefix or suffix may be applied only to a specified symbology (reference Code Selection, starting on page 107) or across all symbologies (set via the Global features in this chapter).
- You can add any character from the ASCII Chart (from 00-FF) on the inside back cover of this manual as a prefix, suffix or Label ID.
- Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the output.
Global Prefix/Suffix
Up to 20 ASCII characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the barcode data) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the barcode data) as indicated in Figure 17.
Figure 17. Prefix and Suffix Positions

flowchart
graph TD
A["OR..."] --> B["Label ID"]
B --> C["Bar Code Data"]
C --> D["Label ID"]
D --> E["Suffix"]
F["Prefix"] --> G["00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)"]
H["AND OR"] --> I["00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)"]
Example: Setting a Prefix
In this example, we'll set a prefix for all symbologies.
- Determine which ASCII character(s) are to be added to scanned barcode data. In this example, we'll add a dollar sign (\$') as a prefix.
- Go to page 78 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode.
- Scan the SET GLOBAL PREFIX barcode.
- Reference the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex value assigned to the desired character. The corresponding hex number for the '\$' character is 24. To enter this selection code, scan the '2' and '4' barcodes from Appendix D Keypad.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to terminate the string.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode once again to exit Programming Mode.
- The resulting message string would appear as follows:
Scanned barcode data:12345
Resulting message string output: \$12345
Global AIM ID

This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology types.
AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label identifiers) can be included with scanned barcode data. AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows:
- A close brace character (ASCII ']), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by... - A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).
| SYMBOLOGY CHAR | SYMBOLOGY CHAR | ||
| UPC/EAN | E^a | Code 128/GS1-128 C | |
| Code 39 and Code 32 | A | DataBar Omnidirectional, DataBar Expanded | e |
| Codabar F Standard 2 of 5 S | |||
| Interleaved 2 of 5 I ISBN | x^b | ||
| Code 93 | G | Code 11 | H |
a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs.
b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)
Figure 18. AIM ID

text_image
Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID SuffixLabel ID
A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex 0x01-0xFF), used to identify a barcode (symbology) type. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted barcode data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded set (see "Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets" below) or individually per symbology (see "Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 303). If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see "Global AIM ID" on page 79.
Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets
The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. Table 38 shows the USA and the EU sets.

CAUTION
When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or custom defaults will be lost.
Table 38. Label ID Pre-loaded Sets
| Symbology USA Label ID | set EU Label ID set | |||
| ASCII character | Hexidecimal value | ASCII character | Hexidecimal value | |
| ABC Codabar S 530000 S 530000 | ||||
| Anker Plessey o 6F0000 o 6F0000 | ||||
| CODABAR % 250000 R 520000 | ||||
| Codablock F | I | 6C0000 | m | 6D0000 |
| CODE11 | CE | 434500 | b | 620000 |
| CODE128 | # | 230000 | T | 540000 |
| CODE32 | A | 410000 | X | 580000 |
| CODE39 | * | 2A0000 | V | 560000 |
| CODE39 CIP | Y | 590000 | Y | 590000 |
| CODE4 | 4 | 340000 | 4 | 340000 |
| CODE5 | j | 6A0000 | j | 6A0000 |
| CODE93 | & | 260000 | U | 550000 |
| DATALOGIC 2OF5 | s | 730000 | s | 730000 |
| EAN13 | F | 460000 | B | 420000 |
| EAN13 P2 | F | 460000 | L | 4C0000 |
| EAN13 P5 | F | 460000 | M | 4D0000 |
| EAN13 P8 | F | 460000 | # | 230000 |
| EAN8 FF 464600 A 410000 | ||||
| EAN8 P2 FF 464600 J 4A0000 | ||||
| EAN8 P5 | FF | 464600 | K | 4B0000 |
| EAN8 P8 FF 464600 * 2A0000 | ||||
| FOLLETT 2OF5 O 4F0000 O 4F0000 | ||||
| GS1 DATABAR EXPANDED | RX | 525800 | t | 740000 |
| GS1 DATABAR LIMITED | RL | 524C00 | v | 760000 |
| GS1 DATABAR OMNIDIRECTIONAL | R4 | 523400 | u | 750000 |
| GS1-128 | 000000 | k | 6B0000 | |
| GTIN | G | 470000 | A | 244100 |
| GTIN2 | G2 | 473200 | B | 244200 |
| GTIN5 | G5 | 473500 | C | 244300 |
| GTIN8 | G8 | 473800 | D | 244400 |
| IATA | IA | 494100 | & | 260000 |
| Industrial 2 of 5 | W | 570000 | W | 570000 |
| Interleaved 2 of 5 | i | 690000 | N | 4E0000 |
| Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR | e | 650000 | e | 650000 |
| ISBN | I | 490000 | @ | 400000 |
| ISBT128 | f | 660000 | f | 660000 |
| ISSN | n | 6E0000 | n | 6E0000 |
| MSI | @ 400000 Z 5A0000 | |||
| Plessey | a | 610000 | a | 610000 |
| S25 | s | 730000 | P | 500000 |
| UPCA | A | 410000 | C | 430000 |
| UPCA P2 | A | 410000 | F | 460000 |
| UPCA P5 | A | 410000 | G | 470000 |
| UPCA P8 | A | 410000 | Q | 510000 |
Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology
To configure a Label ID individually for a single symbology:
- Go to page 81 and scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode.
- Select Label ID position as either BEFORE (Enable as Prefix) or AFTER (Enable as suffix) by scanning the appropriate barcode in the section "Label ID Control" on page 82. Reference Figure 19 for Label ID positioning options if multiple identification features are enabled.
- Scan a barcode to select the symbology for which you wish to configure a custom Label ID from the section "Label ID Symbology Selection" on page 83.
- Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will represent the Label ID for the selected symbology.
- Turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits associated with your choice of Label ID. For example, if you wish to select an equal sign (=) as a Label ID, the chart indicates its associated hex characters as 3D. Turn to Keypad, starting on page 345 and scan the barcodes representing the hex characters determined. For the example given, the characters '3' and 'D' would be scanned. More examples of Label ID settings are provided in Table 39.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to exit Label ID entry.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode once again to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the steps to configure a Label ID for a given symbology.
Figure 19. Label ID Position Options

flowchart
graph TD
A["Device"] --> B["Prefix"]
A --> C["Label ID"]
A --> D["Aim ID"]
A --> E["Bar Code Data"]
A --> F["Label ID"]
A --> G["Suffix"]
B --> H["OR"]
C --> H
D --> H
E --> H
F --> H
G --> H
Table 39. Label ID Examples
STEP ACTION EXAMPLES
| 1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode | (Scanner enters Programming Mode) | ||||
| 2. | Determine placement of the Label ID characters BEFORE or AFTER with regard to scanned data using Label ID Control, starting on page 82 | Enable as Prefix | Enable as Suffix | Enable as Prefix | Enable as Suffix |
| 3. | Scan the barcode selecting the symbology type you wish to designate label ID characters for using Label ID Symbology Selection, starting on page 83. | DataBar Omnidirectional | Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 32 | ||
| 4. | Custom Label ID example (desired characters): | DB *=C3+PH | |||
| 5. | Find hex equivalents from the ASCII Chart (inside back cover), then scan in these digits/characters using the barcodes in the section: | 44 42 2A | 3D 43 33 | 2B | 50 48 |
| 6. | Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode | (Scanner exits Label ID entry) | |||
| 7. | Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode once again | (Scanner exits Programming Mode) | |||
| Result: | DB*[barcode data] | [barcode data]=C3 | +[barcode data] | [barcode data]PH | |
Character Conversion
Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done.
For example, if you have the character conversion configuration item set to the following: 41423132FFFFFFF
The first pair is 4142 or AB (41 hex is an ASCII capital A, 42 hex is an ASCII capital B) and the second pair is 3132 or 12 (31 hex is an ASCII 1, 32 is an ASCII 2). The other two pairs are FFFF and FFFF.
With the label, AB12BA21, it would look as follows after the character conversion: BB22BB22.
The A characters were converted to B characters and the 1 characters were converted to 2 characters. Nothing is done with the last two character pairs, since they are all FF.
To set Character Conversion:
- Go to page 90 and scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode.
- Scan the "Configure Character Conversion" barcode.
- Determine the desired string. Sixteen positions must be determined as in the above example. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits needed to fulfill the string.
- Turn to Appendix D Keypad and scan the barcodes representing the hex characters determined in the previous step.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode to exit Programming Mode.

If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT barcode twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.
Reading Parameters
Label Gone Timeout
This feature sets the time after the last label segment is seen before the reader prepares for a new label. The timeout can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (2.55 seconds) in 10ms increments. Label Gone Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull for each label that is read
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
- Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
- Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20 = 020, etc.
-
Go to page 93 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
-
Scan the barcode: SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING.
-
Scan the appropriate three alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 40 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 40. Timeout Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 50ms 150ms | 1800ms (1.8 sec.) | 2550ms (2.55 sec.) | ||
| 2 | Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes) | 005 015 180 | 255 | ||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 4 Scan SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING | |||||
| 5 | Scan Three Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘5’ | ‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’ | ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
Good Read LED Duration
This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (0.001 to 2.55 seconds) in 100ms increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
- Determine the desired setting in milliseconds. A setting of 0 means that the good read LED stays on until the next time the trigger is pulled.
- Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 000, 20 = 020, etc.
- Go to page 100 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 41 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 41. Good Read LED Duration Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | Good Read LED stays on until next trigger pull (00) | 20ms 150ms | 2550ms (2.55 sec.) | ||
| 2 | Divide by 10 (and pad with leading zeroes) | 000 002 015 255 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 4 Scan SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING | |||||
| 5 | Scan Three Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘2’ | ‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’ | ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
Scanning Features
Scan Mode
This mode is associated with typical handheld reader operation. Selects the scan operating mode for the reader. The following selections are valid for all models:
Trigger Single. When the trigger is pulled, scanning is activated until one of the following occurs:
- Scanning Active Time has elapsed
- a label has been read
- the trigger is released
Trigger Hold Multiple. When the trigger is pulled, scanning starts and the product scans until the trigger is released or Scanning Active Time has elapsed. Reading a label does not disable scanning. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.
Trigger Pulse Multiple. When the trigger is pulled, continuous scanning is activated until Scanning Active Time has elapsed or the trigger has been released and pulled again. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.
Flashing. The reader flashes ^1 on and off regardless of the trigger status. Flash rate is controlled by Flash On Time and Flash Off Time. When Flash is ON the imager reads continuously; when Flash is OFF scanning is deactivated.

Flashing is the recommended scan mode for Gryphon L hands-free (stand mode) of operation
Always On. No trigger pull is required to read a barcode. Scanning is continually on. If the trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it is in Trigger Single Mode. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.
The following two features are valid only for the Gryphon I (desk and mobile), but not the Gryphon Laser model. See "Laser Features" on page 281 for specific parameters for the Laser model.
Stand Mode. No trigger pull is required to read a barcode. Scanning is turned on automatically when an item is placed in the reader's field of view. If the trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it in single read mode. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads while in this mode.
Trigger Object Sense. This mode is similar to Stand Mode, except that a trigger pull is required to activate the decoder.
Scanning Active Time
This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
- Determine the desired setting.
- Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20 = 020, etc.
- Go to page 104 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 42 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 42. Scanning Active Time Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 1 Second | 90 Sec. (1.5 min.) | 180 Sec. (3 min.) | 255 Seconds (4.25 min.) |
| 2 Pad leading zero(es) | 001 090 180 255 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 | Scan SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING | |||
| 5 | Scan Three Characters FromAppendix D Keypad | ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’ | ‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’ | ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
Flash On Time
This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.
- Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
- Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
- Go to page 105 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING.
- Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 43 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 43. Flash On Time Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 500ms | 1,000ms (1 sec.) | 5200ms (5.2 sec.) | 9,900ms (9.9 sec.) | |
| 2 | Divide by 100 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits) | 05 10 52 99 | |||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
| 4 | Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING | ||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘5’ | ‘1’ and ‘0’ | ‘5’ and ‘2’ | ‘9’ and ‘9’ |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||||
Flash Off Time
This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments.
Follow these instructions to set this feature.
- Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.
-
Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.
-
Go to page 105 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
-
Scan the barcode: SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING.
-
Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 44 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 44. Flash Off Time Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | |||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 500ms | 1,000ms (1 sec.) | 5200ms (5.2 sec.) | 9,900ms (9.9 sec.) | |
| 2 | Divide by 100 (and pad with leading zeroes to yield two digits) | 05 10 52 99 | |||
| 3 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 4 | Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING | ||||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘5’ | ‘1’ and ‘0’ | ‘5’ and ‘2’ | ‘9’ and ‘9’ |
| 6 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
Display Settings
Display Mode
The user can control the reader display behavior according to the following selections:
Local Echo mode: When a barcode is read with the reader:
• The code is sent to the Host.
• The reader display is cleared.
- The code is also sent to the reader display (Local Echo).
- The cursor is positioned after the last printed character on the reader display.
Normal mode: When a barcode is read with the reader:
• The code is sent to the Host.
- The reader display is not cleared. Therefore if any previous data was displayed on the reader screen it remains.
- There is no Local Echo to the reader display.
Clear Display After Decode mode: When a barcode is read with the reader:
• The code is sent to the Host.
- The reader display is cleared. Therefore if any previous data was displayed on the reader screen it is cancelled and the screen remains blank.
- There is no Local Echo of the code to the reader display.
Host messages sent to the reader are always written to the reader display.
RF Features
Configuration Update
Automatic Configuration Update
When this feature is enabled, the base station and reader will keep their configurations synchronized. If a reader's configuration is altered by reading programming labels, this change is automatically transferred and updated in a linked base station. Likewise, if the base station's configuration is changed using Aladdin or by host commands, then the reader's configuration will automatically be updated if this feature is enabled.
RF Address Stamping
Source Radio Address Delimiter Character
This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio address when address stamping is enabled.

This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmission" on page 269 is enabled.
Follow these instructions to select the delimiter character:
- Determine the desired character, then find its hexadecimal equivalent on the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover. A setting of 00 specifies no delimiter character.
- Go to page 269 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
- Scan the barcode: SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMITER CHARACTER.
- Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the hexadecimal characters which were determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 45 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 45. Source Radio Address Delimiter Character Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | No delimiter character | , (comma) - (dash) / (slash) | ||
| 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
| 3 Scan SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMITER CHARACTER | ||||
| 4 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | ‘0’ and ‘0’ | ‘2’ and ‘C’ | ‘2’ and ‘D’ |
| 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||
STAR Radio Protocol Timeout
This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and Base Station is considered failed.
When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds.
Follow these instructions to set this feature:
- Determine the desired setting.
- Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 = 05, 25 = 25, etc
-
Go to page 270 and scanScan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
-
Scan the barcode: SELECT RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT.
-
Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.
This completes the procedure. See Table 46 for some examples of how to set this feature.
Table 46. Wedge Intercode Delay Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||
| 1 Desired Setting | 2 Seconds | 5 Seconds | 10 Seconds | 25 Seconds |
| 2 Pad with leading zero(es) | 02 05 10 25 | |||
| 3 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||
| 4 | Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING | |||
| 5 | Scan Two Characters From Appendix D Keypad | '0' and '2' | '0' and '5' | '1' and '0' |
| 6 | Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | |||
BT-Only Features
BT Pin Code
This option specifies the 4-character pin code to be used for authentication of the BT link. "BT Security Mode" on page 277 must first be enabled to require the pin code.
To set the pin code:
- Determine the desired character s. For example, D254.
-
Convert the characters to hexadecimal using the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual. In the case of the example, the hexadecimal equivalents would be: D = 0x44, 2 = 0x32, 5 = 0x35, and 4 = 0x34
-
Go to page 278 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.
-
Scan the barcode: SELECT BT PIN CODE.
-
Scan the appropriate alpha-numeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D Keypad, representing the hexadecimal entries which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.
- Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Programming Mode.

Changing the pin code setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled setting, the Pin Code setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin. After the Base Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.
This completes the procedure. See Table 47 for examples of how to set this feature.
Table 47. BT Pin Code Setting Examples
| STEP ACTION EXAMPLES | ||||||
| 1 | Desired Setting | 1234 | D254 | 1359 | STOR | |
| 2 | Convert the characters to hexadecimal | 31 32 33 34 44 | 32 35 34 31 33 | 35 39 53 54 4F 52 | ||
| 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||||
| 4 Scan SELECT LABEL GONE TIMEOUT SETTING | ||||||
| 5 | Scan the Eight Alpha-Numeric Characters FromAppendix D Keypad | 31323334 | 44323534 | 31333539 | 53544F52 | |
| 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE | ||||||
NOTES
Message Formatting

Message Formatting is only available for the Gryphon™ Mobile model.
A message from the Host to the base must follow these rules:
- If Address stamping options or address delimiter are enabled on the base, the Host replay must have address field and delimiter too. Otherwise the message will be ignored. Address delimiter is present only when address stamping is enabled.
- Address stamping is necessary to correctly route the message to the Gryphon I, especially when more than one handheld is linked to the same base. Address stamping could be disabled if the system is in point to point configuration. If address stamping is not enabled, the messages are addressed to the first handheld linked to the base.
- Messages end with "CR" 0x0D ASCII character . The CR character cannot be contained in the middle.
- Messages cannot start with '\$' or # because these are reserved for Service mode command
- Base station can receive host message only if Host Commands Obey/Ignore is set to Ignore.
- Message could be sent to the HH in response to a Label when “Transmit mode” require Ack from Host (see transmit mode parameter) or at any time. When messages are sent not in response to a label must start with DC2 0x12 ASCII character and could be sent in any transmit mode setting.
- Message could be sent to all HH linked to base by using a Multicast message: "00 00 00 00 2A AA"
- In order to receive a message, handhelds must not be in sleep state.
The format of the ACK from Host message (used for transmission mode 02) is:
[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] MESSAGE
The format of a generic message From Host to HH is:
[Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] DC2 MESSAGE
where DC2 is ASCII 0x12 (^R) character.
[Items in square brackets are optional.]
- If you want to control the Scanner's beeper from the host, you will also probably want to disable the good transmission beep that is emitted when the code is received from the cradle. (See Wireless Beeper Features on page 258).
The message field can store plain text and escape sequences.
- Escape sequences are interpreted as commands.
- Plain text is directly printed on the display. If writing beyond the end of line, the display does not wrap automatically. Extra characters are ignored. Control characters are not interpreted (i.e. LF, FF, etc.).
Cursor Control
ESC[nA Up n rows, no scroll
ESC[nB Down n rows, no scroll
ESC[nC Right n columns
ESC [nD Left n columns
ESC [G] CR
ESC[r;cH Move to row r, column c (ESC[1;1H is the upper left character position of the display)
ESC D Down 1 row, with scroll
ESC E CR and cursor down 1 row with scroll
ESC M Up 1 row and scroll
NOTES:
- Since CR is used as the message terminator, you must use ESC [ G or ESC E to print a CR.
- The cursor row position is not affected by the currently selected font. The display always has 4 rows, so when writing with the large font, actually two rows are written to: the current one and the one below it. You will need two ESC E commands to step from one row to the next when using the large font.
- The cursor column position is affected by the currently selected font. Therefore, column 6 is 36 pixels from the left border only if you last selected the 6x8 font; otherwise it could be 48 or 72 pixels from the left border.
Font Selection
ESC [0 m Normal mode
ESC [7 m] Reverse mode
ESC # 4 Large font: subsequent characters are written on the current row and the row below it using the 12x16 font which allows for two rows of eight characters on the display.
ESC # 5 Normal font: subsequent characters are written using the 6x8 font, which allows for four rows of sixteen characters on the display.
ESC # 7 Medium font: subsequent characters are written using the 8x8 font, which allows for 4 rows of 12 characters on the display.
Clearing Display
| ESC [0 K | From cursor position to end of line inclusive |
| ESC [1 K | From beginning of line to cursor position (not inclusive) |
| ESC [2 K | Entire line |
| ESC [0 J | From cursor position to end of display inclusive |
| ESC [1 J | From beginning of display to cursor position (not inclusive) |
| ESC [2 J | Entire display; moves cursor to upper left corner on display |
LED and Beeper Control
| ESC[0 q | Emit short High tone + short delay |
| ESC[1 q | Emit short Low tone + short delay |
| ESC[2 q | Emit long Low tone + short delay |
| ESC[3 q | Emit good read tone |
| ESC[4 q | Emit bad tx tone |
| ESC[5 q | Wait 100 ms |
| ESC[6 q | Turn on the green LED |
| ESC[7 q | Turn off the green LED |
| ESC[8 q | Turn on the green spot |
| ESC[9 q | Turn off the green spot |
| ESC[0 r | Beep for Find me function (new) |
| ESC[1 r | Power-off (new) |
The LED control escape sequences are intended to activate the LEDs for short periods of time and can be used in combination with the Beeper. The LED and Beeper will be controlled by the system after the entire command sequence is interpreted.
Example:
| ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 3 q ESC [ 7 q | Turns on the green LED, emits a good read tone, and turns off the green LED. |
| ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 5 q ESC [ 7 q | Turns on the green LED for 100 ms and then turns off the green LED. |
Messages from Scanner Command Keys
The Gryphon ^™ I series scanners with display have 3 command keys that can each be associated with a character to send to the host.
By pressing the keys on the scanner, the associated character with its relative message formatting is sent to the Host. For example, keys can be used to select items from a menu sent to the scanner display by the application program.
The messages are handled by the system as if they were barcodes, that's why KeyID can have so many fields appended to it. If in your application there is some chance of reading a 1-char barcode identical to KeyID, the way you can distinguish between the two is to enable the Code ID: The KeyID is the only 1-character long EAN 8 code.
The default characters associated with each key (KeyID) are shown in the following table:
| (left) Key '<' | |
| (center) Key '=' | |
| (right) Key '>' |
Appendix A
Technical Specifications
Table 48 contains Physical and Performance Characteristics, User Environment and Regulatory information. Table 49 provides Standard Cable Pinouts.
Table 48. Technical Specifications
| Item Description | ||
| Physical Characteristics | ||
| Color White/Gray | Gray/Gray | |
| Dimensions Height 7.1"/181 mm | Length 3.9"/100 mmWidth 2.8"/71 mm | |
| Weight (without cable) GD 41x0/GD4300: Approximately 6.0 ounces/169 gGM4100/GBT4100: Approximately 8.7 ounces/246 gBC40x0: Approximately 8.7 ounces/246 gBC40x0-CF: Approximately 10.1 ounces/290 g | ||
| Electrical Characteristics | ||
| Voltage & Current | GD4130 model:5V±5% Input range. 1.9W max.360 mA (max) at 5V2.5 mA RS-232 sleep mode/ USB suspendGD4110 model:4.5÷14V Input range. Power 1.8W max.340 mA (max) at 5V.2.5 mA (RS-232 sleep mode / USB suspend)BC40x0 base:4.75-14V; Input range. Power 8W max^a ;Imax 500mA when in host/bus powered mode^a . | GD4330 model:Input current at 5V±5% = 260 mA (max)2.5 mA (USB suspend)Standby (typical) <= 30mAGD4310 model:Input Power =1.2W max in the 4.5÷14V range2.5 mA (USB suspend)Standby (typical): 30mA @5V (90mA @5V for IBM46xx)BC40x0-CF base:10-14V; Input range. Power 8W max^a ;Imax 800mA . |
| Battery Type Li-Ion battery pack | ||
| Charge time for full charge from full discharge | 4 hours with external power supply adapter^b | |
| Max 22h hours with Host power(In this case no supply adapter is needed) ^b | ||
| Item | Description | |
| Operating autonomy(continuous reading) | GM4100: 50,000 reads (typical)GBT4100: 30,000 reads (typical) | |
| Performance Characteristics GD41x0 model: GD43x0 model: | ||
| Light Source Dual LEDs 650nm Class 2 Laser | ||
| Roll (Tilt) Tolerance ± 35° from normal | ||
| Pitch Tolerance GD 41x0/GM4100/GBT4100: ± 65°GD4300: ± 50° | ||
| Skew (Yaw) Tolerance ± 65° | ||
| Field of View 10" (25.4cm) wide at 12.5" (31.8cm)from the reader | Scan Angle: 47° (normal) or 35° (narrow) | |
| Depth of Field (Typical) C (3 mil - 2.9" to 4.7" (7.5cm to 12cm)13 mil C - 1.2" to 23.6" (3cm to 60cm)20 mil - 1.2" to 31.5" (3cm to 80cm) | 5 mil - 1.4" to 6.22" (3,6cm to 15,8cm)13 milC - 0.87" to 18.7" (2,2cm to 47,5cm)20 mil - up to 27.1" (to 69cm) | |
| Minimum Element Width 3 mil 4 mil | ||
| Print Contrast Minimum 15% minimum reflectance | ||
| Decode Capability | UPC/EAN/JAN, P2 /P5, ISBN/ISSN; Code 39, Code39 FullASCII; Italian Pharmacode 39, Code39 CIP; Code 128, GS1-128; C128 ISBT; Code 128 addons;l 2 of 5; Standard 2 of 5; l 2 of 5 CIP HR; Industrial 2 of 5; IATA; Datalogic 2 of 5; Follet 2 of 5; Code 11; Plessey, Anker Plessey; Codabar, ABC Codabar ; Code 93; MSI; GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBarTM Limited, GS1 Data-BarTM Expanded; Code 4, Code 5; Codablock F, Codablock F EAN; | |
| Interfaces Supportedd | RS-232 Std, RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf, RS-232 OPOS, IBM 46xx (ports 5B and 9B), USB Com Std., USB Keyboard, USB Alternate Keyboard,USB OEM, Keyboard Wedge (AT with or w/o Alternate Key, IBM AT PS2 with or w/o Alternate Key, PC-XT, IBM 3153, IBM Terminals 31xx, 32xx,34xx, 37xx make only and make break keyboard, Digital Terminals VT2x, VT3xx, VT4xx, and Apple) and Wand Emulation. | |
| User Environment | ||
| Operating Temperature | GD 41x0: 32° to 131° F (0° to 55°C)GM4100/GBT4100/GD4300: 32° to 122° F (0° to 50°C) | |
| Charging Temperature | 32° to 104° F (0° to 40°C) | |
| Storage Temperature | -4° to 158° F (-20° to 70°C) | |
| Humidity | Operating: 5% to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing | |
| Drop Specifications | 18 drops from 1.8 meters (5.9 feet) to concrete | |
| Ambient Light Immunity | Up to 100,000 Lux | |
| Contaminants Spray/Rain/Dust/Particulates | IP52 | |
| ESD Level | 16 KV | |
| Item | Description |
| Regulatory | |
| Electrical Safety | See the Quick Reference Guide for each specific product for details. |
| EMI/RFI | |
| Laser Safety | |
| LED class safety | |
a. Typical input current measured under factory default configuration.
b. Charge Times are much lower when battery is within daily typical operating condition.
c. 13 mils DOF based on EAN. All others are C ode 39. All labels grade A, typical environmental light, 20°C, label inclination 10°
d. See "Interface Selection" on page 28 for a listing of available interface sets by model type.
| Radio Features | Model | ||
| 433MHz model 910 Mhz BT | |||
| Working Center Frequency | 433.920 MHz | 910.000 MHz | 2400 to 2483.5 MHz |
| Range (in open air) 30 m 15 m 30 m | |||
| Max. number of devices per base station 16 16 1 | |||
Standard Cable Pinouts
Figure 20 and Table 49 provide standard pinout information for the Base Station's interface cable.
Figure 20. Standard Cable Pinouts

text_image
Bottom of Scanner Pin 10 Pin 1 Interface Cable Port Cable Strain Relief To Host Cable Clip (Latch) CableThe signal descriptions in Table 49 apply to the connector on the reader and are for reference only.
Table 49. Standard Cable Pinouts — Reader Side
| Pin | RS-232 | OEM | USB | Keyboard Wedge |
| 1 RTS (out) | ||||
| 2 D+ | CLKIN (KBD side) | |||
| 3 D- | DATAIN (KBD side) | |||
| 4 GND | GND GND GND | |||
| 5 RX | ||||
| 6 TX | ||||
| 7 | VCC | VCC | VCC | VCC |
| 8 | IBM_B | CLKOUT (PC side) | ||
| 9 | IBM_A | DATAOUT (PC side) | ||
| 10 | CTS (in) |
LED and Beeper Indications
The reader's beeper sounds and its LED illuminates to indicate various functions or errors on the reader. An optional “Green Spot” also performs useful functions. The tables below list these indications. One exception to the behaviors listed in the tables is that the reader's functions are programmable, and may or may not be turned on. For example, certain indications such as the power-up beep can be disabled using programming barcode labels.
Table 50. LED and Beeper Indications
| INDICATION DESCRIPTION LED BEEPER | |||
| Power-up Beep The reader is in the process of power-ing-up. | Reader beeps four times at highest frequency and volume upon power-up. | ||
| Good Read Beep A label has been successfully scanned by the reader. | LED behavior for this indication is configurable via the feature "Good Read: When to Indicate" | The reader will beep once at current frequency, volume, mono/bi-tonal setting and duration upon a successful label scan. | |
| ROM Failure There is an error in the reader's software/programming | Flashes | Reader sounds one error beep at highest volume. | |
| Limited Scanning Label Read | Indicates that a host connection is not established when the IBM or USB interface is enabled. | N/A | Reader 'chirps' six times at the highest frequency and current volume. |
| Reader Active Mode | The reader is active and ready to scan. | The LED is lit steadilya | N/A |
| Reader Disabled | The reader has been disabled by the host. | The LED blinks continuously | N/A |
| Green Spot is on continuously | While in Stand Mode or Trigger Stand Mode the green spot shall be on while in stand watch state. | N/A N/A | |
| Green Spota flashes momentarily | Upon successful read of a label, the software shall turn the green spot on for the time specified by the configured value. | N/A N/A | |
a. Except when in sleep mode or when a Good Read LED Duration other than 00 is selected
Table 51. Programming Mode Indications
| Programming Mode - The following indications ONLY occur when the reader is in Programming Mode. | |||
| Label Programming Mode Entry | A valid programming label has been scanned. | LED blinks continuously | Reader sounds four low frequency beeps. |
| Label Programming Mode Rejection of Label | A label has been rejected. | N/A | Reader sounds three times at lowest frequency & current volume. |
| Label Programming Mode Acceptance of Partial Label | In cases where multiple labels must be scanned to program one feature, this indication acknowledges each portion as it is successfully scanned. | N/A | Reader sounds one short beep at highest frequency & current volume. |
| Label Programming Mode Acceptance of Programming | Configuration option(s) have been successfully programmed via labels and the reader has exited Programming Mode. | N/A | Reader sounds one high frequency beep and 4 low frequency beeps followed by reset beeps. |
| Label Programming Mode Cancel Item Entry | Cancel label has been scanned. | N/A | Reader sounds two times at low frequency and current volume. |
Error Codes
Upon startup, if the reader sounds a long tone, this means the reader has not passed its automatic Selftest and has entered FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) isolation mode. If the reader is reset, the sequence will be repeated. The following table describes the LED flashes/beep codes associated with an error found.
| NUMBER OF LED FLASHES/BEEPS | ERROR CORRECTIVE | ACTION |
| 1 Configuration | Contact Helpdesk for assistance | |
| 2 Interface PCB | ||
| 4 Reader Module | ||
| 5 Laser Pointer (if so equipped) | ||
| 6 Digital PCB | ||
| 14 CPLD/Code Mismatch |
Base Station Indications
| INDICATION LEDS | |
| Power-up Complete Yellow LED on | |
| Reader Disabled by the HOST or the communication with HOST is not established | Yellow LED blinking ~1Hz |
| Data/labels are transmitted to the HOST | Yellow LEDs turned off for 100mSec |
| Programming Mode Yellow LED blinks quickly | |
| Base and handheld are exchanging data Red LED blinks quickly | |
| Battery charging in progress Red LED on | |
| Battery charging complete Green LED on | |
| Battery charger error Green LED and Red LEDs blink alternatively ~1Hz | |
| No handheld is placed on the cradle Red and Green LEDs off |
NOTES
Appendix B
Standard Defaults
The most common configuration settings are listed in the "Default" column of the table below. Page references are also provided for feature descriptions and programming barcodes for each parameter. A column has also been provided for recording of your preferred default settings for these same configurable features.
Table 52. Standard Defaults
| Parameter Default Your Setting | Page Number | ||
| GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES | |||
| Host Commands — Obey/Ignore 39 | |||
| USB Suspend Mode 39 | |||
| RS-232 ONLY | |||
| Baud Rate | 9600 | 42 | |
| Data Bits | 8 Data Bits | 43 | |
| Stop Bits | 1 Stop Bit | 43 | |
| Parity | None | 44 | |
| Handshaking Control | Disable | 45 | |
| RS-232/USB-COM | |||
| Intercharacter Delay | No Delay | 47 | |
| Beep On ASCII BEL | Disable | 47 | |
| Beep On Not on File | Enable | 48 | |
| ACK Character | 'ACK' | 50 | |
| NAK Character | 'NAK' | 50 | |
| ACK NAK Timeout Value | 600 ms | 51 | |
| ACK NAK Retry Count | 3 Retries | 51 | |
| ACK NAK Error Handling | Ignore Errors Detected | 52 | |
| Indicate Transmission Failure | Enable | 52 | |
| Disable Character | ‘D’ | 53 | |
| Enable Character | ‘E’ | 53 | |
| KEYBOARD WEDGE | |||
| Country Mode | U.S. Keyboard | 56 | |
| Caps Lock State | Caps Lock OFF | 58 | |
| Numlock | Numlock Key Unchanged | 59 | |
| Send Control Characters | Disable | 60 | |
| Wedge Quiet Interval | 100 ms | 61 | |
| Intercharacter Delay | No Delay | 62 | |
| Intercode Delay | 100 ms | 63 | |
| USB Keyboard Speed | 1 ms | 64 | |
| USB-OEM | |||
| USB-OEM Device Usage | Handheld Scanner | 68 | |
| Interface Options | Ignore Host Configuration Commands | 68 | |
| IBM 46xx | |||
| 46xx Number of Host Resets | 6 | 70 | |
| Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format | IBM Standard Format | 72 | |
| Interface Options | Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands | 72 | |
| WAND EMULATION | |||
| Wand Signal Speed | 660 ms | 74 | |
| Wand Polarity | Quiet Zones & Spaces High, Bars Low | 74 | |
| Wand Idle State | High | 75 | |
| Transmit Noise | Disable | 75 | |
| Label Symbology Conversion | No conversion | 76 | |
| DATA FORMAT | |||
| Global Prefix/Suffix | No Global Prefix Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR) | 78 | |
| Global AIM ID | Disable | 79 | |
| GS1-128 AIM ID | Enable | 80 | |
| Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets | USA Set | 81 | |
| Label ID Control | Disable | 82 | |
| Set Global Mid Label ID Characters | No Mid Label ID Character | 89 | |
| Case Conversion | Disable | 90 | |
| Character Conversion | No Char Conversion | 90 | |
| READING PARAMETERS | |||
| Double Read Timeout | 0.4 Second | 91 | |
| Label Gone Timeout | 160 ms | 93 | |
| Sleep Mode Timeout | Disable | 94 | |
| Power On Alert | 4 Beeps | 96 | |
| Good Read: When to Indicate | After Decode | 96 | |
| Good Read Beep Type | Mono | 97 | |
| Good Read Beep Frequency | Medium | 97 | |
| Good Read Beep Length | 80 ms | 98 | |
| Good Read Beep Volume | High | 99 | |
| Good Read LED Duration | LED on until next trigger pull | 100 | |
| Scan Mode | Trigger Single | 101 | |
| Stand Mode Triggered Timeout | 0.5 second | 102 | |
| Stand Detection | Switch to Stand mode | 103 | |
| Stand Mode Sensitivity | Medium | 104 | |
| Scanning Active Time | 5 Seconds | 104 | |
| Flash On Time | 1 Second | 105 | |
| Flash Off Time | 600 ms | 105 | |
| Green Spot Duration | 300 ms | 106 | |
| CODE SELECTION | |||
| Coupon Control | Enable UPCA coupon decoding | 109 | |
| UPC-A | |||
| UPC-A Enable/Disable | Enable | 110 | |
| UPC-A Check Character Transmission | Enable | 110 | |
| Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 | Don't Expand | 111 | |
| UPC-A Number System Character Transmission | Transmit | 111 | |
| UPC-A Minimum Reads | 1 | 112 | |
| UPC-E | |||
| UPC-E Enable/Disable | Enable | 113 | |
| UPC-E Check Character Transmission | Send | 113 | |
| Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 | Don't Expand | 114 | |
| Expand UPC-E to UPC-A | Don't Expand | 114 | |
| UPC-E Number System Character Transmission | Transmit | 115 | |
| UPC-E Minimum Reads | 2 | 115 | |
| GTIN | |||
| GTIN Formatting | Disable | 116 | |
| EAN 13 (Jan 13) | |||
| EAN 13 Enable/Disable | Enable | 117 | |
| EAN 13 Check Character Transmission | Send | 117 | |
| EAN-13 Flag 1 Character | Transmit | 118 | |
| EAN-13 ISBN Conversion | Disable | 118 | |
| EAN 13 Minimum Reads | 1 | 119 | |
| ISSN | |||
| ISSN Enable/Disable | Disable | 120 | |
| EAN 8 | |||
| EAN 8 Enable/Disable | Enable | 121 | |
| EAN 8 Check Character Transmission | Send | 121 | |
| Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 | Disable | 122 | |
| EAN 8 Minimum Reads | 1 | 122 | |
| UPC/EAN Global Settings | |||
| UPC/EAN Decoding Level | 3 | 123 | |
| UPC/EAN Correlation | Disable | 124 | |
| UPC/EAN Price Weight Check | Disable | 124 | |
| In-Store Minimum Reads | 2 | 125 | |
| Add-Ons | |||
| Optional Add-ons | Disable P2, P5 and P8 | 126 | |
| Optional Add-On Timer | 70 ms | 127 | |
| Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer | Disable | 130 | |
| P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads | 2 | 133 | |
| P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads | 1 | 134 | |
| GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads | 1 | 135 | |
| Code 39 | |||
| Code 39 Enable/Disable | Enable | 136 | |
| Code 39 Check Character Calculation | Calculate | 136 | |
| Code 39 Check Character Transmission | Send | 137 | |
| Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission | Don’t Transmit | 138 | |
| Code 39 Full ASCII | Disable | 138 | |
| Code 39 Quiet Zones | Auto | 139 | |
| Code 39 Minimum Reads | 2 | 140 | |
| Code 39 Decoding Level | 3 | 141 | |
| Code 39 Length Control | Variable | 142 | |
| Code 39 Set Length 1 | 2 | 143 | |
| Code 39 Set Length 2 | 50 | 144 | |
| Code 39 Interdigit Ratio | 4 | 145 | |
| Code 39 Character Correlation | Disable | 147 | |
| Code 39 Stitching | Enable | 147 | |
| Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code) | |||
| Code 32 Enable/Disable | Disable | 148 | |
| Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions | N/A | 148 | |
| Code 32 Check Char Transmission | Don’t Send | 149 | |
| Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission | Don’t Transmit | 149 | |
| Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical Code) | |||
| Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable | Disable | 148 | |
| Code 128 | |||
| Code 128 Enable/Disable | Enable | 151 | |
| Parameter Default Your Setting | Page Number | |
| Expand Code 128 to Code 39 | Don't Expand | 151 |
| Code 128 Check Character Transmission | Send | 152 |
| Code 128 Function Character Transmission | Don't Send | 152 |
| Code 128 Sub-Code Change Transmission | Disable | 153 |
| Code 128 Quiet Zones | Auto | 154 |
| Code 128 Minimum Reads | 1 | 155 |
| Code 128 Decoding Level | 3 | 156 |
| Code 128 Length Control | Variable | 157 |
| Code 128 Set Length 1 | 1 | 158 |
| Code 128 Set Length 2 | 80 | 159 |
| Code 128 Character Correlation | Disable | 160 |
| Code 128 Stitching | Enable | 160 |
| GS1-128 | ||
| GS1-128 Enable | Transmit in Code 128 Data Format | 161 |
| ISBT 128 | ||
| ISBT 128 Concatenation | Disable | 162 |
| ISBT 128 Force Concatenation | Disable | 162 |
| ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode | Static | 163 |
| ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout | 200 msec | 164 |
| ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options | Disable | 164 |
| Codablock F | ||
| Codablock F Enable/Disable | Disable | 165 |
| Codablock F EAN Enable/Disable | Disable | 165 |
| Codablock F AIM Check | Enable check C | 166 |
| Codablock F Length Control | Variable | 166 |
| Codablock F Set Length 1 | 3 characters | 167 |
| Codablock F Set Length 2 | 100 characters | 168 |
| Interleaved 2 of 5 | ||
| I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable | Enable | 169 |
| I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation | Disable | 169 |
| I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission | Send | 170 |
| Parameter Default Your Setting | Page Number | ||
| 1 2 of 5 Minimum Reads | 2 | 192 | |
| 2 of 5 Decoding Level | 3 | 192 | |
| 1 2 of 5 Length Control | Variable | 173 | |
| 1 2 of 5 Set Length 1 | 12 | 174 | |
| 1 2 of 5 Set Length 2 | 100 | 175 | |
| 1 2 of 5 Character Correlation | Disable | 176 | |
| 1 2 of 5 Stitching | Disable | 176 | |
| Follett 2 of 5 | |||
| Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable | Disable | 177 | |
| Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR | |||
| Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable | Disable | 177 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 | |||
| Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable | Disable | 178 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation | Disable | 178 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission | Send | 179 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads | 2 | 179 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Decoding Level | 3 | 180 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Length Control | Variable | 180 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 | 8 | 181 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 | 50 | 182 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation | Disable | 183 | |
| Standard 2 of 5 Stitching | Disable | 183 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 | |||
| Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable | Disable | 184 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation | Disable | 184 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission | Enable | 185 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control | Variable | 185 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 | 1 | 186 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 | 50 | 187 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads | 1 | 188 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching | Disable | 188 | |
| Industrial 2 of 5 Character Correlation | Disable | 189 | |
| Code IATA | |||
| IATA Enable/Disable | Disable | 190 | |
| IATA Check Character Transmission | Enable | 190 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 | |||
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Enable/Disable | Disable | 191 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation | Disable | 191 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Minimum Reads | 2 | 192 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Decoding Level | 3 | 192 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Length Control | Variable | 193 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 1 | 6 characters | 194 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Set Length 2 | 50 | 195 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Character Correlation | Disable | 196 | |
| Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching | Disable | 196 | |
| Codabar | |||
| Codabar Enable/Disable | Disable | 197 | |
| Codabar Check Character Calculation | Don't Calculate | 197 | |
| Codabar Check Character Transmission | Send | 198 | |
| Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission | Transmit | 198 | |
| Codabar Start/Stop Character Set | abcd/abcd | 199 | |
| Codabar Start/Stop Character Match | Don't Require Match | 199 | |
| Codabar Quiet Zones | Auto | 200 | |
| Codabar Minimum Reads | 2 | 201 | |
| Codabar Decoding Level | 3 | 202 | |
| Codabar Length Control | Variable | 202 | |
| Codabar Set Length 1 | 3 | 204 | |
| Codabar Set Length 2 | 50 | 205 | |
| Codabar Interdigit Ratio | 4 | 206 | |
| Codabar Character Correlation | Disable | 208 | |
| Codabar Stitching | Disable | 208 | |
| ABC Codabar | |||
| ABC Codabar Enable/Disable | Disable | 209 | |
| ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode | Static | 209 | |
| ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout | 200 msec | 210 | |
| ABC Codabar Force Concatenation | Disable | 211 | |
| Code 11 | |||
| Code 11 Enable/Disable | Disable | 212 | |
| Code 11 Check Character Calculation | Check C and K | 212 | |
| Code 11 Check Character Transmission | Send | 213 | |
| Code 11 Minimum Reads | 2 | 213 | |
| Code 11 Length Control | Variable | 214 | |
| Code 11 Set Length 1 | 4 | 215 | |
| Code 11 Set Length 2 | 50 | 216 | |
| Code 11 Interdigit Ratio | 4 | 217 | |
| Code 11 Decoding Level | 3 | 219 | |
| Code 11 Character Correlation | Disable | 220 | |
| Code 11 Stitching | Disable | 220 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional | |||
| GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Enable/Disable | Disable | 221 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation | Disable | 221 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads | 1 | 222 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Expanded | |||
| GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Enable/Disable | Disable | 223 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Expanded GS1-128 Emulation | Disable | 223 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads | 1 | 224 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Length Control | Variable | 224 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Set Length 1 | 1 | 225 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Set Length 2 | 74 | 226 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Limited | |||
| GS1 DataBarTM Limited Enable/Disable | Disable | 227 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Limited GS1-128 Emulation | Disable | 227 | |
| GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads | 1 | 228 | |
| Code 93 | |||
| Code 93 Enable/Disable | Disable | 229 | |
| Code 93 Check Character Calculation | Enable Check C and K | 229 | |
| Code 93 Check Character Transmission | Enable | 230 | |
| Code 93 Length Control | Variable | 230 | |
| Code 93 Set Length 1 | 1 | 231 | |
| Code 93 Set Length 2 | 50 | 232 | |
| Code 93 Minimum Reads | 1 | 233 | |
| Code 93 Decoding Level | 3 | 234 | |
| Code 93 Quiet Zones | Auto | 235 | |
| Code 93 Stitching | Enable | 236 | |
| Code 93 Character Correlation | Enable | 236 | |
| MSI | |||
| MSI Enable/Disable | Disable | 237 | |
| MSI Check Character Calculation | Enable Mod10 | 237 | |
| MSI Check Character Transmission | Enable | 238 | |
| MSI Length Control | Variable | 239 | |
| MSI Set Length 1 | 1 | 239 | |
| MSI Set Length 2 | 50 | 240 | |
| MSI Minimum Reads | 4 | 241 | |
| MSI Decoding Level | 3 | 242 | |
| MSI Stitching | Disable | 243 | |
| MSI Character Correlation | Disable | 243 | |
| Plessey | |||
| Plessey Enable/Disable | Disable | 244 | |
| Plessey Check Character Calculation | Enable Plessey std. check char. verification | 245 | |
| Plessey Check Character Transmission | Enable | 245 | |
| Plessey Length Control | Variable | 246 | |
| Plessey Set Length 1 | 1 | 247 | |
| Plessey Set Length 2 | 50 | 248 | |
| Plessey Minimum Reads | 4 | 249 | |
| Plessey Decoding Level | 3 | 250 | |
| Plessey Stitching | Disable | 251 | |
| Plessey Character Correlation | Disable | 251 | |
| Code 4 | |||
| Code 4 Enable/Disable | Disable | 252 | |
| Code 4 Check Character Transmission | Send | 252 | |
| Code 4 Hex to Decimal Conversion | Enable | 253 | |
| Code 5 | |||
| Code 5 Enable/Disable | Disable | 253 | |
| Code 5 Check Character Transmission | Send | 254 | |
| Code 5 Hex to Decimal Conversion | Enable | 254 | |
| Code 4 and 5 Common Configuration Items | |||
| Code 4 and 5 Decoding Level | 3 | 255 | |
| Code 4 and Code 5 Minimum Reads | 1 | 256 | |
| WIRELESS FEATURES | |||
| Good Transmission Beep | Enable | 258 | |
| Beep Frequency | Low | 258 | |
| Beep Duration | 80 msec | 259 | |
| Beep Volume | High | 260 | |
| Disconnect Beep | Enable | 260 | |
| Base Station Beep | Enable | 261 | |
| Leash Alarm | Disable | 261 | |
| Automatic Configuration Update | Enable | 263 | |
| Automatic Flash Update | Disable | 264 | |
| Powerdown Timeout | 60 minutes (1 hour) | 265 | |
| Batch Mode | Disable | 267 | |
| RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay | No Delay | 268 | |
| Source Radio Address Transmission | Do not include | 269 | |
| Source Radio Address Delimiter Character | Enable | 269 | |
| Features for Star Models Only | |||
| STAR Radio Protocol Timeout | 2 seconds | 270 | |
| STAR Radio Transmit Mode | ACK from cradle | 270 | |
| Display (STAR model only) | |||
| - Contrast 272 | |||
| - Font Size | Small | 272 | |
| - Backlight | Off | 273 | |
| - Display Mode | Local Echo mode | 273 | |
| - Display Timeout | Disable | 274 | |
| Keypad Select | 3C3D3E | 276 | |
| Features for BT Models Only | |||
| BT Security Mode | Disable | 277 | |
| BT Pin Code | 31323334 =Default Pin Code is 1234 | 278 | |
| BT Poll Rate | 20 ms | 279 | |
| LASER FEATURES | |||
| Laser Scan Angle | 47 degrees | 282 | |
| Laser Idle Mode | Disable | 282 | |
| Bi-Directional Read Decoding | Enable | 283 | |
| Always On Scan Mode Timeout | 5 Hours | 284 | |
The sample barcodes in this appendix are typical representations for their symbology types.

text_image
0 12345 67890 5 UPC-A
text_image
3 456789 012340 EAN-13
text_image
123ABC Code 39
text_image
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234 Code 128
text_image
12345678901231 Interleaved 2 of 5Sample Barcodes — continued

GS1 DataBar™ (RSS)

GS1 DataBar™ variants must be enabled to read the barcodes below (see GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional on page 221).

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a horizontal bar at the bottom10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523
(GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Stacked)

text_image
Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a central bar1234890hjio9900mnb
(GS1 DataBar™ Expanded)

08672345650916
(GS1 DataBar™ Limited)
GS1 DataBar™-14

55432198673467
(GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Truncated)

78123465709811
(GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked)

90876523412674
(GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked)
NOTES
Appendix D Keypad
Use the barcodes in this appendix to enter numbers as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() |
Keypad
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() | |
![]() |
NOTES
Appendix E
Scancode Tables
Control Character Emulation
Control character emulation selects from different scancode tables as listed in this appendix. Each of the control character sets below are detailed by interface type in the tables. These apply to Wedge and USB Keyboard platforms.
Control Character 00. Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 01. Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Capital Key, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.
Control Character 02. Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to 0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table (Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 — See page -356.)
Single Press and Release Keys
In the following tables, Ar↓ means Alt right pressed and Ar↑ means Alt right released and so on. Definitions for other keys are Al (Alt left), Cr (Control Right) Cl (Control Left) Sh (shift). This method can be used for combining Alt, Control or Shift with other keys.
Example: Consider a Control character set to 00. If AltRight+A is required before sending a label to the host, it could be done by setting three Prefix keys in this way: 0x99 0x41 0x9A.
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE
Table 53. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
Extended characters (sky blue) are sent through dedicated keys (when available in the selected country mode) or by using an Alt Mode sequence.
Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE — cont.
Table 54. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
| x0 | x1 | x2 | x3 | x4 | x5 | X6 | x7 | x8 | x9 | xA | xB | xC | xD | xE | xF | |
| 0x | Ar↓ | Ar↑ | Al↓ | Al ↑ | Cl ↓ | Cl ↑ | Cr ↓ | Cr ↑ | BS | Tab | → | S+ Tab | Enter Keypd | Enter Ins | Pg Up | |
| 1x | Pg Dwn | Home | ← | ↓ | ↑ | F6 | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | ESC | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 |
| 2x | Space | ! | " | # | S | % | & | ' | ( | ) | * | + | , | - | . | / |
| 3x | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | : | ; | < | - | > | ? |
| 4x | @ | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O |
| 5x | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | Y | Z | | | \ | | | ^ | _ |
| 6x | ` | a | b | c | d | e | f | g | h | i | j | k | l | m | n | o |
| 7x | p | q | r | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z | { | | | } | ~ | Del |
| 8x € | = | ' | f | " | ... | † | ‡ | ^ | ‰ | Š | < | Š | < | Œ | □ | |
| 9x | □ | ' | ' | " | " | • | - | — | ^ | TM | § | > | œ | □ | ž | Ÿ |
| Ax | NBSP | ¡ | ¢ | £ | ɔ | ¥ | | | § | " | © | " | « | - | - | ® | - |
| Bx | ° | ± | ? | ? | ' | μ | ¶ | . | . | ' | ° | » | 1⁄2 | 1⁄2 | 3⁄4 | ¿ |
| Cx | À | Á | Â | Ã | Ã | Â | Æ | Ç | Ê | Ê | Ê | Ê | ì | Í | Î | Ï |
| Dx | Đ | - | Ô | Ó | Ô | Ô | Õ | × | ∅ | Ù | Ù | Û | Û | Ÿ | þ | ß |
| Ex | à | á | â | ã | ã | à | œ | ç | é | é | ê | ë | ì | í | î | ï |
| Fx | ð | ñ | ò | ó | ô | ô | ô | : | ø | ù | ú | ù | ù | ÿ | þ | ÿ |
Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode
Table 55. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
| x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE Xf | ||||||||||||||||
| 0x | Alt+000 | Alt+001 | Alt+002 | Alt+003 | Alt+004 | Alt+005 | Alt+006 | Alt+007 | BS | HT TAB | Alt+010 | Alt+011 Alt+012 | CR Enter | Alt+014 Alt+015 | ||
| 1x | Alt+016 | Alt+017 | Alt+018 | Alt+019 | Alt+020 | Alt+021 | Alt+022 | Alt+023 | Alt+024 | Alt+025 | Alt+026 | ESC Esc | Alt+028 Alt+029 Alt+030 Alt+031 | |||
| 2x | A+032 | A+033 | A+034 | A+035 | A+036 | A+037 | A+038 | A+039 | A+040 | A+041 | A+042 | A+043 | A+044 | A+045 | A+046 | A+047 |
| 3x | A+048 | A+049 | A+050 | A+051 | A+052 | A+053 | A+054 | A+055 | A+056 | A+057 | A+058 | A+059 | A+060 | A+061 | A+062 | A+063 |
| 4x | A+064 | A+065 | A+066 | A+067 | A+068 | A+069 | A+070 | A+071 | A+072 | A+073 | A+074 | A+075 | A+076 | A+077 | A+078 | A+079 |
| 5x | A+080 | A+081 | A+082 | A+083 | A+084 | A+085 | A+086 | A+087 | A+088 | A+089 | A+090 | A+091 | A+092 | A+093 | A+094 | A+095 |
| 6x | A+096 | A+097 | A+098 | A+099 | A+100 | A+101 | A+102 | A+103 | A+104 | A+105 | A+106 | A+107 | A+108 | A+109 | A+110 | A+111 |
| 7x | A+112 | A+113 | A+114 | A+115 | A+116 | A+117 | A+118 | A+119 | A+120 | A+121 | A+122 | A+123 | A+124 | A+125 | A+126 | A+127 |
| 8x | € | Sh↓ | Sh↑ | Ins | Ent (keyp) | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | F6 | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 | F11 |
| 9x | F12 | Home | End | Pg Up | Pg Dwn | ↑ | ↓ | ← | → | Ar↓ | Ar↑ | Al↓ | Al↑ | Cl↓ | Cl↑ | Cr↓ |
| Ax | Cr↑ | A+0161 | A-0162 | A+0163 | A+0164 | A+0165 | A+0166 | A+0167 | A+0168 | A-0169 | A+0170 | A+0171 | A+0172 | A+0173 | A+0174 | A+0175 |
| Bx | A-0176 | A+0177 | A+0178 | A+0179 | A+0180 | A+0181 | A+0182 | A+0183 | A+0184 | A+0185 | A+0186 | A+0187 | A-0188 | A+0189 | A+0190 | A+0191 |
| Cx | A+0192 | A+0193 | A+0194 | A+0195 | A-0196 | A+0197 | A+0198 | A+0199 | A+0200 | A+0201 | A+0202 | A+0203 | A+0204 | A+0205 | A+0206 | A+0207 |
| Dx | A+0208 | A+0209 | A+0210 | A+0211 | A-0212 | A+0213 | A+0214 | A+0215 | A+0216 | A+0217 | A+0218 | A+0219 | A+0220 | A+0221 | A-0222 | A+0223 |
| Ex | A-0224 | A+0225 | A+0226 | A+0227 | A+0228 | A+0229 | A+0230 | A+0231 | A+0232 | A+0233 | A+0234 | A+0235 | A+0236 | A+0237 | A+0238 | A+0239 |
| Fx | A-0240 | A+0241 | A+0242 | A-0243 | A+0244 | A+0245 | A+0246 | A-0247 | A+0248 | A+0249 | A-0250 | A+0251 | A+052 | A+0253 | A+0254 | A+0255 |
Interface type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode — cont.
Table 56. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
| x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF | ||||||||||||||||
| 0x | Ar↓ | Ar↑ | Al↓ | Al ↑ | Cl ↓ | Cl ↑ | Cr ↓ | Cr ↑ | BS | Tab | → | S+ Tab | Enter Keypd | Enter | Ins | Pg Up |
| 1x | Pg Dwn | Home | ← | ↓ | ↑ | F6 | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | ESC | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 |
| 2x | A+032 | A+033 | A+034 | A+035 | A+036 | A+037 | A+038 | A-039 | A+040 | A+041 | A+042 | A+043 | A+044 | A-045 | A+046 | A+047 |
| 3x | A+048 | A+049 | A+050 | A+051 | A+052 | A+053 | A+054 | A-055 | A+056 | A+057 | A+058 | A+059 | A+060 | A-061 | A+062 | A+063 |
| 4x | A+064 | A+065 | A+066 | A+067 | A+068 | A+069 | A+070 | A-071 | A+072 | A+073 | A+074 | A+075 | A+076 | A-077 | A+078 | A+079 |
| 5x | A-080 | A+081 | A+082 | A-083 | A-084 | A+085 | A+086 | A-087 | A+088 | A+089 | A+090 | A+091 | A+092 | A-093 | A+094 | A+095 |
| 6x | A-096 | A+097 | A+098 | A-099 | A-100 | A+101 | A+102 | A-103 | A+104 | A+105 | A+106 | A+107 | A+108 | A-109 | A+110 | A+111 |
| 7x | A-112 | A+113 | A+114 | A-115 | A+116 | A+117 | A+118 | A-119 | A+120 | A+121 | A+122 | A+123 | A+124 | A-125 | A+126 | A+127 |
| 8x | A+0128 | A-0129 | A+0130 | A+0131 | A-0132 | A-0133 | A+0134 | A+0135 | A-0136 | A+0137 | A+0138 | A+0139 | A+0140 | A+0141 | A+0142 | A-0143 |
| 9x | A+0144 | A-0145 | A+0146 | A+0147 | A-0148 | A-0149 | A+0150 | A+0151 | A-0152 | A+0153 | A+0154 | A+0155 | A+0156 | A+0157 | A+0158 | A-0159 |
| Ax | A+0160 | A+0161 | A-0162 | A+0163 | A+0164 | A+0165 | A-0166 | A+0167 | A+0168 | A-0169 | A+0170 | A+0171 | A-0172 | A-0173 | A+0174 | A+0175 |
| Bx | A+0176 | A+0177 | A-0178 | A+0179 | A+0180 | A+0181 | A-0182 | A+0183 | A+0184 | A-0185 | A+0186 | A+0187 | A-0188 | A-0189 | A+0190 | A+0191 |
| Cx | A-0192 | A+0193 | A+0194 | A+0195 | A+0196 | A-0197 | A+0198 | A+0199 | A-0200 | A+0201 | A+0202 | A+0203 | A+0204 | A+0205 | A+0206 | A-0207 |
| Dx | A-0208 | A+0209 | A+0210 | A+0211 | A+0212 | A+0213 | A+0214 | A+0215 | A-0216 | A+0217 | A+0218 | A+0219 | A+0220 | A+0221 | A+0222 | A-0223 |
| Ex | A+0224 | A+0225 | A-0226 | A+0227 | A+0228 | A+0229 | A+0230 | A+0231 | A+0232 | A-0233 | A+0234 | A+0235 | A-0236 | A-0237 | A+0238 | A+0239 |
| Fx | A+0240 | A-0241 | A+0242 | A+0243 | A+0244 | A+0245 | A-0246 | A+0247 | A+0248 | A-0249 | A+0250 | A+0251 | A+052 | A-0253 | A+0254 | A+0255 |
Digital Interface
Table 57. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
| X0 | x1 | x2 | x3 | x4 | x5 | x6 | x7 | x8 | x9 | xA | xB | xC | xD | xE | xF | |
| 0x | NULLC+@ | SOHC(S)+A | STXC(S)+B | ETXC(S)+C | EOTC+D | ENQC(S)+E | ACKC(S)+F | BELC(S)+G | BS | HTTAB | LFC(S)+J | VTC(S)+K | FFC(S)+L | CREnter | SOC(S)+N | SIC(S)+O |
| 1x | DLEC(S)+P | DC1C(S)+Q | DC2C(S)+R | DC3C(S)+S | DC4C(S)+T | NAKC(S)+U | SYNC(S)+V | ETBC(S)+W | CANC(S)+X | EMC(S)+Y | SUBC(S)+Z | ESCEsc | FSC(S)+\ | GSC+] | RSC(S)+^ | USC(S)+_ |
| 2x | Space | ! | “ | # | S | % | & | ‘ | ( | ) | * | + | , | - | . | / |
| 3x 0 | 2 3 4 5 6 7 | 8 9 : | ;<=>? | |||||||||||||
| 4x | @ | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O |
| 5x | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | Y | Z | [ | \ | ] | ^ | _ |
| 6x 'a | b c d e f g h i | j k l m n o | ||||||||||||||
| 7x | p | q | r | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z | { | | | } | ~ | Del |
| 8x | Sh↓ | Sh↑ | Ins | Ent (keyp) | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | F6 | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 | F11 | |
| 9x | F12 | F13 | F14 | F15 | F16 | ↑ | ↓ | ← | → | Cl ↓ | Cl ↑ | |||||
Table 58. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
| X0 | x1 | x2 | x3 | x4 | x5 | x6 | x7 | x8 | x9 | xA | xB | xC | xD | xE | xF | |
| 0x | Cl ↓ | Cl ↑ | BS | Tab | à | S+ Tab | Enter Keypd | Enter | Ins | |||||||
| 1x | ← | ↓ | ↑ | F6 | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | ESC | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 | ||
| 2x | Space | ! | “ | # | S | % | & | * | ( | ) | * | + | , | - | . | / |
| 3x | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | ; | ; | < | = | > | ? |
| 4x | @ | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O |
| 5x | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | Y | Z | [ | \ | ] | ^ | _ |
| 6x a b c d e f g h i | j k l m n o | |||||||||||||||
| 7x | p | q | r | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z | { | | | } | ~ | Del |
IBM31xx 102-key
Table 59. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
| X0 | x1 | x2 | x3 | x4 | x5 | x6 | x7 | x8 | x9 | xA | xB | xC | xD | xE | xF | |
| 0x | NULLC+@ | SOHC(S)+A | STXC(S)+B | ETXC(S)+C | EOTC+D | ENQC(S)+E | ACKC(S)+F | BELC(S)+G | BS | HTTAB | LFC(S)+J | VTC(S)+K | FFC(S)+L | CREnter | SOC(S)+N | SIC(S)+O |
| 1x | DLEC(S)+P | DC1C(S)+Q | DC2C(S)+R | DC3C(S)+S | DC4C(S)+T | NAKC(S)+U | SYNC(S)+V | ETBC(S)+W | CANC(S)+X | EMC(S)+Y | SUBC(S)+Z | ESCEsc | FSC(S)+\ | GSC+] | RSS(S)+^ | USC(S)+_ |
| 2x | Space | ! | “ | # | S | % | & | ‘ | ( | ) | * | + | , | - | . | / |
| 3x 0 | 2 3 4 5 6 7 | 8 9 : | ;<=>? | |||||||||||||
| 4x | @ | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O |
| 5x | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | Y | Z | [ | \ | ] | ^ | _ |
| 6x * a | B c d e f | g h i | k l m n o | |||||||||||||
| 7x | p | q | R | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z | { | | | } | Del | |
| 8x | Sh↓ | Sh↑ | Ins | Ent(keyp) | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | F6 | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 | F11 | |
| 9x | F12 | Enter | Reset | Inscrt | Delete | Field - | Field + | Enter paddle | Printl | Ar↓ | Ar↑ | Al↓ | Al ↑ | Cl ↓ | Cl ↑ | Cr ↓ |
| Ax | Cr ↑ |
Table 60. Scancode Set When Control Character is 02
| X0 | x1 | x2 | x3 | x4 | x5 | x6 | x7 | x8 | x9 | xA | xB | xC | xD | xE | xF | |
| 0x | Ar↓ | Ar↑ | Al↓ | Al ↑ | Cl ↓ | Cl ↑ | Cr ↓ | Cr ↑ | BS | Tab | → | S+ Tab | Enter Keypd | Enter | Ins | Pg Up |
| 1x | Pg Dwn | Homc | ← | ↓ | ↑ | F6 | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | ESC | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 |
| 2x | Space | ! | “ | // | S | % | & | * | ( | ) | * | + | , | - | . | / |
| 3x | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | ; | ; | < | = | > | ? |
| 4x | @ | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O |
| 5x | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | Y | Z | [ | \ | ] | ^ | _ |
| 6x a | B c d c | f g h i | j k l m n o | |||||||||||||
| 7x | p | q | R | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z | { | | | } | Del |
IBM XT
Table 61. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01
| X0 | x1 | x2 | x3 | x4 | x5 | x6 | x7 | x8 | x9 | xA | xB | xC | xD | xE | xF | |
| 0x | NULLC+@ | SOHC(S)+A | STXC(S)+B | ETXC(S)+C | EOTC+D | ENQC(S)+E | ACKC(S)+F | BELC(S)+G | BSC(S)+H | HTTAB | LFC(S)+J | VTC(S)+K | FFC(S)+L | CREnter | SOC(S)+N | SIC(S)+O |
| 1x | DLEC(S)+P | DC1C(S)+Q | DC2C(S)+R | DC3C(S)+S | DC4C(S)+T | NAKC(S)+U | SYNC(S)+V | ETBC(S)+W | CANC(S)+X | EMC(S)+Y | SUBC(S)+Z | ESCEsc | FSC(S)+\ | GSC+] | RSC(S)+^ | USC(S)+_ |
| 2x | Space | ! | “ | # | S | % | & | ‘ | ( | ) | * | + | , | - | . | / |
| 3x 0 | | 2 3 4 5 6 7 | 8 9 : | ;<=>? | |||||||||||||
| 4x | @ | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O |
| 5x | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | Y | Z | [ | \ | ] | ^ | _ |
| 6x - a | B c d e f | g h i | k l m n o | |||||||||||||
| 7x | p | q | R | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z | { | | | } | Del | |
| 8x | Sh↓ | Sh↑ | Ins | Ent (keyp) | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | F6 | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 | F11 | |
| 9x | F12 | IHome | End | Pg Up | Pg Dwn | ↑ | ↓ | ← | → | Ar↓ | Ar↑ | Al↓ | Al↑ | Cl↓ | Cl↑ | Cr↓ |
| Ax | Cr ↑ |
Table 62. Scancode Set when Control Character 02
| X0 | x1 | x2 | x3 | x4 | x5 | x6 | x7 | x8 | x9 | xA | xB | xC | xD | xE | xF | |
| 0x | Ar↓ | Ar↑ | Al↓ | Al↑ | Cl↓ | Cl↑ | Cr↓ | Cr↑ | BS | Tab | → | S+ Tab | Enter Keypd | Enter | Ins | Pg Up |
| 1x | Pg Dwn | Home | ← | ↓ | ↑ | F6 | F1 | F2 | F3 | F4 | F5 | ESC | F7 | F8 | F9 | F10 |
| 2x | Space | ! | " | # | S | % | & | * | ( | ) | * | + | , | - | . | / |
| 3x | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | : | ; | < | - | > | ? |
| 4x | @ | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | I | J | K | L | M | N | O |
| 5x | P | Q | R | S | T | U | V | W | X | Y | Z | [ | \ | ] | ^ | _ |
| 6x‘a | B c d e | f g h i | k l m n o | |||||||||||||
| 7x | p | q | R | s | t | u | v | w | x | y | z | { | | | } | Del |
Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252
Windows-1252 is a character encoding of the Latin alphabet, used by default in the legacy components of Microsoft Windows in English and some other Western languages.
| 00 | 01 | 02 | 03 | 04 | 05 | 06 | 07 | 08 | 09 | 0A | 0B | 0C | 0D | OE | OF | |
| 00 | NUL0000 | STX0001 | SOT0002 | ETX0003 | EOT0004 | EJO0005 | ACK0006 | BEL0007 | BS0008 | HT0009 | LF000A | YT000B | PF000C | CR000D | SO000E | SI000F |
| 10 | DLE0010 | DC10011 | DC20012 | DC30013 | DC40014 | NAK0015 | SYN0016 | ETR0017 | CAN0018 | EM0019 | SUB001A | ESC001B | PS001C | GS001D | RS001E | US001F |
| 20 | SP0020 | I0021 | "0022 | #0023 | $0024 | %0025 | &0026 | *0027 | (0028) | )0029 | *002A | +002B | ,002C | -002D | .002E | /002F |
| 30 | 0030 | 10031 | 20032 | 30033 | 40034 | 50035 | 60036 | 70037 | 80038 | 90039 | :003A | ;003B | <003C | =003D | >003E | ?003F |
| 40 | @0040 | A0041 | B0042 | C0043 | D0044 | E0045 | F0046 | G0047 | H0048 | I0049 | J004A | K004B | L004C | M004D | N004E | O004F |
| 50 | P0050 | Q0051 | R0052 | S0053 | T0054 | U0055 | V0056 | W0057 | X0058 | Y0059 | Z006A | [006B | \006C | ]006D | ^006E | _006F |
| 60 | `0060 | a0061 | b0062 | c0063 | d0064 | e0065 | f0066 | g0067 | h0068 | i0069 | j006A | k006B | l006C | m006D | n006E | o006F |
| 70 | p0070 | q0071 | r0072 | s0073 | t0074 | u0075 | v0076 | w0077 | x0078 | y0079 | z007A | {007B | |007C | ↑007D | ~007E | DEL007F |
| 80 | €20AC | ,201A | f002 | "201E | ...2026 | †2020 | ‡2021 | ^02C6 | %2030 | §0060 | <2039 | GE0152 | £017D | |||
| 90 | ,201B | '2019 | "201C | "201D | •2022 | -2013 | -2014 | ^02DC | m2122 | §0161 | y203A | oe0153 | £017E | ¥0178 | ||
| A0 | NESP00A0 | I00A1 | ∅00A2 | £00A3 | x00A4 | ¥00A5 | I00A6 | S00A7 | "00A8 | @00A9 | #00A1 | «00AB | -00AC | -00AD | @00AE | -00AF |
| BD | °00B0 | ±00B1 | z00B2 | #00B3 | ^00B4 | p00B5 | T00B6 | ·00B7 | ,00B8 | 100B9 | °00BA | »00BB | ###00BC | 1⁄200BD | 1⁄400BE | ¿00BF |
| CD | À00C0 | À00C1 | À00C2 | À00C3 | À00C4 | À00C5 | À00C6 | Ç00C7 | È00C8 | É00C9 | É00CA | ß00CB | ì00CC | î00CD | î00CE | î00CF |
| DD | ß00D0 | Ñ00D1 | ò00D2 | ó00D3 | ò00D4 | ò00D5 | ò00D6 | ×00D7 | ∅00D8 | ù00D9 | ú00DA | ü00DB | ü00DC | ý00DD | ß00DE | ß00EF |
| EO | à00E0 | á00E1 | â00E2 | á00E3 | ä00E4 | å00E5 | æ00E6 | ç00E7 | è00E8 | é00E9 | ê00EA | è00EB | i00EC | í00ED | î00EE | i00EF |
| FO | ð00F0 | ñ00F1 | ò00F2 | ó00F3 | ð00F4 | ð00F5 | ö00F6 | ÷00F7 | ø00F8 | ù00F9 | ú00FA | ü00FB | ü00FC | ý00FD | þ00FE | ý00FF |
NOTES
A
Aladdin™ 16
B
barcodes
cancel 345 numeric barcodes 345
RS-232 baud rate 64 RS-232 parameters parity 58, 177, 252, 253, 256
battery
WARNINGS 15
Beeper
Pitch, Good Read 97 Volume, Good Read 99
Beeper, Good Read 96
C
Cable Pinouts 324
Clear to Send 285
Code 39 Format 72
Conversion, case 90 Conversion, character 90, 305
Convert to Code 128 76
Convert to Code 39 76
Coupon Control 109 CTS 285
D
Datalogic Aladdin™ 16
Defaults 329
Dimensions 321
E
Error Codes 326
Errors 326
G
Good Read, Beeper 96
Pitch 97 Volume 99
Good Read, Beeper - 96
Good Read, Beeper Pitch - 97
Good Read, Beeper Volume - 99
Green Spot 325
H
Handheld Scanner 68
Host Resets 70
I
IBM interface selection 29
IBM Standard Format 72
Idle State (wand) 75
Indications 325
Interface Cable 18
ISSN 120
K
keyboard support 56 KEYBOARD WEDGE (KBW) interface selection 30
Keyboard Wedge Connection 19
M
Mixed OEM Standard + Code 39 Format 72
N
numbers lock key 59
P
Performance Characteristics 322
Physical Characteristics 321
Pitch - Good Read, Beeper 97
Polarity (wand) 74
Prefix/Suffix 78, 299
Product Specifications 321
Programming Barcodes 16
R
Read, Beeper – Good 96
Read, Beeper Pitch - Good 97
Read, Beeper Volume - Good 99
Reading Configuration Barcodes 38
Request to Send 285
RS-232 interface selection 29
RS-232 Serial Connection 18
RTS 285
S
sample barcodes
code 128 341
code 39 341
interleaved 2 of 5 342
Scancode Tables 349
select digits/characters 345
Serial Output 324
Signal Speed (wand) 74
Standard Cable Pinouts 324
Suffix 78,299
Symbology Conversion 76
symbology types 341
T
Table Top Scanner 68
U
UPC 110
USB Connection 19
USB interface selection 29
V
Volume - Good Read, Beeper 99
W
Weight 321
X
XON/XOFF 286
ASCII Chart
| ASCII Char. | Hex No. | ASCII Char. | Hex No. | ASCII Char. | Hex No. | ASCII Char. | Hex No. |
| NUL | 00 | SP | 20 | @ | 40 | ‘ | 60 |
| SOH | 01 | ! | 21 | A | 41 | a | 61 |
| STX | 02 | “ | 22 | B | 42 | b | 62 |
| ETX | 03 | # | 23 | C | 43 | c | 63 |
| EOT | 04 | $ | 24 | D | 44 | d | 64 |
| ENQ | 05 | % | 25 | E | 45 | e | 65 |
| ACK | 06 | & | 26 | F | 46 | f | 66 |
| BEL | 07 | ’ | 27 | G | 47 | g | 67 |
| BS | 08 | ( | 28 | H | 48 | h | 68 |
| HT | 09 | ) | 29 | I | 49 | i | 69 |
| LF | 0A | * | 2A | J | 4A | j | 6A |
| VT | 0B | + | 2B | K | 4B | k | 6B |
| FF | 0C | , | 2C | L | 4C | l | 6C |
| CR | 0D | - | 2D | M | 4D | m | 6D |
| SO | 0E | . | 2E | N | 4E | n | 6E |
| SI | 0F | / | 2F | O | 4F | o | 6F |
| DLE | 10 | 0 | 30 | P | 50 | p | 70 |
| DC1 | 11 | 1 | 31 | Q | 51 | q | 71 |
| DC2 | 12 | 2 | 32 | R | 52 | r | 72 |
| DC3 | 13 | 3 | 33 | S | 53 | s | 73 |
| DC4 | 14 | 4 | 34 | T | 54 | t | 74 |
| NAK | 15 | 5 | 35 | U | 55 | u | 75 |
| SYN | 16 | 6 | 36 | V | 56 | v | 76 |
| ETB | 17 | 7 | 37 | W | 57 | w | 77 |
| CAN | 18 | 8 | 38 | X | 58 | x | 78 |
| EM | 19 | 9 | 39 | Y | 59 | y | 79 |
| SUB | 1A | : | 3A | Z | 5A | z | 7A |
| ESC | 1B | ; | 3B | [ | 5B | { | 7B |
| FS | 1C | < | 3C | \ | 5C | l | 7C |
| GS | 1D | = | 3D | ] | 5D | } | 7D |
| RS | 1E | > | 3E | ^ | 5E | ~ | 7E |
| US | 1F | ? | 3F | _ | 5F | DEL | 7F |
Australia
Datalogic Scanning Pty Ltd
Telephone: [61] (2) 9870 3200
australia.scanning@datalogic.com
France and Benelux
Datalogic Scanning SAS
Telephone: [33].01.64.86.71.00
france.scanning@datalogic.com
Germany
Datalogic Scanning KK
Telephone: 81 (0)3 3491 6761
japan.scanning@datalogic.com
Latin America
Datalogic Scanning, Inc
Telephone: (305) 591-3222
latinamerica.scanning@datalogic.com
Singapore
Datalogic Scanning Singapore PTE LTD
Telephone: (65) 6435-1311
singapore.scanning@datalogic.com
Iberia
Datalogic Scanning SAS Sucursal en España
Telephone: 34 91 746 28 60
spain.scanning@datalogic.com
United Kingdom
Datalogic Scanning LTD
Telephone: 44 (0) 1582 464900
uk.scanning@datalogic.com

text_image
DATALOGIC™www.scanning.datalogic.com
Datalogic Scanning, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140

Select RS232-STD
Select RS232-WN
Select RS-232 OPOS
Select USB-COM-STDa
Select IBM-P5B
Select IBM-P9B
Select USB-OEM
Select KBD-AT
Select KBD-AT-NK
Select KBD-AT-ALT
Select KBD-AT-ALT-NK
Select KBD-XT
Select KBD-IBM-3153
Select KBD-IBM-M
Select KBD-IBM-MB
Select KBD-DIG-VI
Select USB Keyboard
Select USB Alternate Keyboard
Select USB-KBD-APPLE
Select WAND
Baud Rate = 1200
Baud Rate = 2400
Baud Rate = 4800
Baud Rate = 9600
Baud Rate = 19,200
Baud Rate = 38,400
Baud Rate = 57,600
Baud Rate = 115,200
8 Data Bits


2 Stop Bits
Parity = None
Parity = Even
Parity = Odd





Intercharacter Delay = No Delay
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting
CANCEL
ACK/NAK Protocol = Disable ACK/NAK
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for host-command acknowledge
ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge
ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors Detected
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid ACK Character
ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid NAK Character
Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable Indication
Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable Indication
Country Mode = Denmark
Country Mode = France
Country Mode = Germany
Country Mode = Hungary
Country Mode = Italy
Country Mode = Japanese 106-key
Country Mode = Norway
Country Mode = Poland
Country Mode = Portugal
Country Mode = Romania
Country Mode = Slovakia
Country Mode = Spain
Country Mode = Sweden
Country Mode = Switzerland
Wedge Send Control Characters = 00
Wedge Send Control Characters = 01
Wedge Send Control Characters = 02
Select Wedge Quiet Interval Setting
CANCEL
Select Intercharacter Delay Setting
CANCEL
Set Intercode Delay
CANCEL
USB Keyboard Speed = 6ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 7ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 8ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 9ms
USB Keyboard Speed = 10ms
USB-OEM Device Usage = Table Top Scanner
USB-OEM Device Usage = Handheld Scanner
Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands
46xx Number of Host Resets = 1
46xx Number of Host Resets = 2
46xx Number of Host Resets = 3
46xx Number of Host Resets = 4
46xx Number of Host Resets = 5
46xx Number of Host Resets = 6
46xx Number of Host Resets = 7
46xx Number of Host Resets = 8
46xx Number of Host Resets = 9
46xx Number of Host Resets = 10
46xx Number of Host Resets = 11
46xx Number of Host Resets = 12
46xx Number of Host Resets = 13
46xx Number of Host Resets = 14
46xx Number of Host Resets = 15
Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands
Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands
Wand Signal Speed = 330ms
Wand Signal Speed = 660ms
Wand Idle State = Low
Wand Idle State = High

Transmit Noise = Disable
Transmit Noise = Transmit leading noise
Transmit Noise = Transmit trailing noise
Transmit Noise = Transmit leading and trailing noise
Set Global Prefix
Set Global Suffix
CANCEL
GS1-128 AIM ID = Disable
GS1-128 AIM ID = Enable

Label ID Transmission = Disable
Label ID Transmission = Enable as Prefix
Label ID Transmission = Enable as Suffix
CANCEL
Set UPC-A Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-A/P2 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-A/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-A/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-E Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-E/P2 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-E/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set UPC-E/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13/P2 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 13/GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 8 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 8/P2 Label ID Character(s)
Set EAN 8/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set GTIN Label ID Character(s)
Set GTIN/P5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 39 Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 32 Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 39 CIP Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 128 Label ID Character(s)
Set GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)
Set ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s)
Set Codablock F Label ID Character(s)
Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Follett 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Label ID Character(s)
Set Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set IATA Label ID Character(s)
Set Datalogic 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s)
Set Codabar Label ID Character(s)
Set ABC Codabar Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 11 Label ID Character(s)
Set DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID Character(s)
Set DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s)
Set DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 93 Label ID Character(s)
Set MSI Label ID Character(s)
Set Plessey Label ID Character(s)
Set Anker Plessey Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 4 Label ID Character(s)
Set Code 5 Label ID Character(s)
Double Read Timeout = 0.1 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.2 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.3 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.4 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.5 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.6 Second
Double Read Timeout = 0.7 Second
Sleep Mode Timeout = Disable
Sleep Mode Timeout = 1 Second
Sleep Mode Timeout = 2 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 3 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 4 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 6 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 7 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 8 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 9 Seconds
Sleep Mode Timeout = 10 Seconds
Power On Alert = Disable (No Audible Indication)
Power On Alert = Four Beeps

Good Read Beep Type = Mono
Good Read Beep Type = Bitonal
Good Read Beep Frequency = Low
Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium
Good Read Beep Frequency = High
Good Read Beep Length = 80 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 100 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 120 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 140 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 160 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 180 msec
Good Read Beep Length = 200 msec
Good Read Beep Volume = Beeper Off
Good Read Beep Volume = Low
Good Read Beep Volume = Medium
Good Read Beep Volume = High
Scan Mode = Trigger Single
Scan Mode = Trigger Hold Multiple
Scan Mode = Trigger Pulse Multiple
Scan Mode = Flashinga
Scan Mode = Always Onb
Scan Mode = Stand Modec
Scan Mode = Trigger Object Sense c
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 0.5 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 1.5 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 2 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 3 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 4 Seconds
Stand Mode Triggered Timeout = 6 Seconds


Select Scanning Active Time Setting
Green Spot Duration = Disable (Green Spot is Off)
Green Spot Duration = Short (300 msec)
Green Spot Duration = Medium (500 msec)
Green Spot Duration = Long (800 msec)
Coupon Control = Allow all coupon barcodes to be decoded
Coupon Control = Enable only UPCA coupon decoding
Coupon Control = Enable only GS1 DataBar ^TM coupon decoding
UPC-A = Disable
UPC-A = Enable
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Send
UPC-A Number System Character = Do not transmit
UPC-A Number System Character = Transmit

UPC-A Minimum Reads = 1
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 2
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 3
UPC-A Minimum Reads = 4
UPC-E = Disable
UPC-E = Enable
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Send
UPC-E Number System Character = Do not transmit
UPC-E Number System Character = Transmit
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 1
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 2
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 3
UPC-E Minimum Reads = 4
EAN 13 = Disable
EAN 13 = Enable
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Send
EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Don’t transmit
EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Transmit

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Convert to ISBN
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 1
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 2
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 3
EAN 13 Minimum Reads = 4
EAN 8 = Disable
EAN 8 = Enable
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Send








UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 2
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 3
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 4
UPC/EAN Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
In-Store Minimum Reads = 1
In-Store Minimum Reads = 2
In-Store Minimum Reads = 3
In-Store Minimum Reads = 4








Optional Add-on Timer = 10ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 20ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 30ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 40ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 50ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 70ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 100ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 120ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 140ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 180ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 220ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 260ms
Optional Add-on Timer = 300ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = Disable
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 10ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 20ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 30ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 40ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 50ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 60ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 70ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 100ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 120ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 140ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 160ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 180ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 200ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 220ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 240ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 260ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 280ms
Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 300ms
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
P2 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
P5 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 1
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 2
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 3
GS1-128 Add-Ons Minimum Reads = 4
Code 39 = Disable
Code 39 = Enable
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don't Calculate
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Std Check
Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Mod 7 Check
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Auto
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 39 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 39 Minimum Reads = 4
Code 39 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Code 39 Decoding Level = 2
Code 39 Decoding Level = 3
Code 39 Decoding Level = 4
Code 39 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 1
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 2
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 3
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 4
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 5
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 6
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 7
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 8
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 9
Code 39 Interdigit Ratio = 10
Code 39 Stitching = Enable
Code 128 = Disable
Code 128 = Enable

Code 128 to Code 39 = Don't Expand
Code 128 to Code 39 = Expand
Code 128 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Auto
Code 128 Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 128 Minimum Reads = 4
Code 128 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Code 128 Decoding Level = 2
Code 128 Decoding Level = 3
Code 128 Decoding Level = 4
Code 128 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)

GS1-128 = Transmit in Code 128 data format
GS1-128 = Do not transmit GS1-128 labels
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec
ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 second
Codablock F = Disable
Codablock F = Enable
Codablock F EAN = Disable
Codablock F AIM Check = Disable
Codablock F AIM Check = Enable Check C

Codablock F Length Control = Variable Length
Codablock F = Fixed Length
CANCEL
12 of 5 = Disable
12 of 5 = Enable
12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable
12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Standard (Modulo 10)
12 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check German Parcel
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4
Follett 2 of 5 = Disable
Follett 2 of 5 = Enable
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Disable
Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4

Standard 2 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable
Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length
Industrial 2 of 5 = Fixed Length
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Industrial 2 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4


Industrial 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable

12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 1
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 2
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 3
12 of 5 Minimum Reads = 4
12 of 5 Character Correlation = Disable
12 of 5 Character Correlation = Enable
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching = Disable
Datalogic 2 of 5 Stitching = Enable
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
Codabar Check Character Transmission = Send
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit
Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit
Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/TN*E
Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/ABCD
Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/tn*e
Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/abcd

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Don't Require Match
Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Require Match
Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zone on one side
Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides
Codabar Quiet Zones = Auto
Codabar Quiet Zones = Virtual Quiet Zones on two sides
Codabar Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides
Codabar Minimum Reads = 1
Codabar Minimum Reads = 2
Codabar Minimum Reads = 3
Codabar Minimum Reads = 4
Codabar Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Codabar Decoding Level = 2
Codabar Decoding Level = 3
Codabar Decoding Level = 4
Codabar Decoding Level = 5
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 1
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 2
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 3
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 4
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 5
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 6
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 7
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 8
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 9
Codabar Interdigit Ratio = 10
ABC Codabar = Disable
ABC Codabar = Enable
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Static
ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Dynamic
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec
ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 Second
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Disable
ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Enable
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check K
Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C and K
Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send
Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Send
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 11 Minimum Reads = 4
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = Disable
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 1
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 2
Code11 Interdigit Ratio = 3
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 4
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 5
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 6
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 7
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 8
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 9
Code 11 Interdigit Ratio = 10
Codabar Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Codabar Decoding Level = 2
Codabar Decoding Level = 3
Codabar Decoding Level = 4
Codabar Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 2
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 3
GS1 DataBarTM Omnidirectional Minimum Reads = 4
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 2
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 3
GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Minimum Reads = 4
Select GS1 DataBarTM Expanded Set Length 1 Setting
CANCEL
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 1
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 2
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 3
GS1 DataBarTM Limited Minimum Reads = 4
Code 93 = Disable
Code 93 = Enable
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Disable
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check K
Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C and K
Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Disable
Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Code 93 Length Control = Variable Length
Code 93 = Fixed Length
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 93 Minimum Reads = 4
Code 93 Decoding Level = Disable
Code 93 Decoding Level = 1 (Conservative)
Code 93 Decoding Level = 2
Code 93 Decoding Level = 3
Code 93 Decoding Level = 4
Code 93 Decoding Level = 5 (Aggressive)
Code 93 Quiet Zones = No Quiet Zones
Code 93 Stitching = Disable
Code 93 Stitching = Enable
Code 93 Character Correlation = Disable
Code 93 Character Correlation = Enable

MSI = Disable
MSI = Enable
MSI Check Character Calculation = Disable
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod11/10
MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10/10
MSI Check Character Transmission = Disable
MSI Check Character Transmission = Enable

MSI Length Control = Variable Length
MSI = Fixed Length
MSI Minimum Reads = 1
MSI Minimum Reads = 2
MSI Minimum Reads = 3
MSI Minimum Reads = 4
MSI Decoding Level = Disable
MSI Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
MSI Decoding Level = 2
MSI Decoding Level = 3
MSI Decoding Level = 4
MSI Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)
MSI Stitching = Disable
MSI Stitching = Enable
MSI Character Correlation = Disable
MSI Character Correlation = Enable
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Plessey std. check char. verification
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Anker check char. verification
Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Plessey std. and Anker check char verification
Plessey Check Character Transmission = Enable
Plessey Minimum Reads = 1
Plessey Minimum Reads = 2
Plessey Minimum Reads = 3
Plessey Minimum Reads = 4
Plessey Decoding Level = Disable
Plessey Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
Plessey Decoding Level = 2
Plessey Decoding Level = 3
Plessey Decoding Level = 4
Plessey Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)
Plessey Stitching = Disable
Plessey Stitching = Enable
Plessey Character Correlation = Disable
Plessey Character Correlation = Enable
Code 4 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send
Code 4 Check Character Transmission = Send









Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 1 (conservative)
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 2
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 3
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 4
Code 4 and Code 5 Decoding Level = 5 (aggressive)
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 1
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 2
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 3
Code 4 or Code 5 Minimum Reads = 4
Good Transmission Beep = Disable
Good Transmission Beep = Enable

Beep Frequency = Low
Beep Frequency = Medium
Beep Frequency = High
Beep Duration = 60 msec
Beep Duration = 80 msec
Beep Duration = 100 msec
Beep Duration = 120 msec
Beep Duration = 140 msec
Beep Duration = 160 msec
Beep Duration = 180 msec
Beep Duration = 200 msec
Beep Volume = Low
Beep Volume = Medium
Beep Volume = High
BT Base Station Beep = Disable
BT Base Station Beep = Enable

Leash Alarm = Disabled
Leash Alarm = 1 Second
Leash Alarm = 2 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 3 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 4 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 5 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 10 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 25 Seconds
Leash Alarm = 30 Seconds
Automatic Configuration Update = Disable
Automatic Configuration Update = Enable
Powerdown Timeout = Disable
Powerdown Timeout = 10 minutes
Powerdown Timeout = 20 minutes
Powerdown Timeout = 40 minutes
Powerdown Timeout = 60 Minutes (1 Hour)
Powerdown Timeout = 120 Minutes (2 Hours)
Powerdown Timeout = 4 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 6 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 8 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 16 Hours
Powerdown Timeout = 24 Hours



RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 0.5 seconds
RF and
RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 2.5 seconds






Display backlight = off
Display backlight = on
Local Echo mode
Normal mode
Clear display after decode
Display Timeout = Disable
Display Timeout = 1 Second
Display Timeout = 2 Seconds
Display Timeout = 3 Seconds
Display Timeout = 4 Seconds
Display Timeout = 5 Seconds
Display Timeout= 6 Seconds
Display Timeout = 7 Seconds
Display Timeout = 8 Seconds
Display Timeout = 9 Seconds
Display Timeout = 9.9 Seconds (9,900ms max.)
Disable Keypad
Enable Keypad Select
CANCEL
BT Poll Rate = Maximum BT Poll Rate
BT Poll Rate = 10 ms
BT Poll Rate = 20 ms
BT Poll Rate = 30 ms
BT Poll Rate = 50 ms
BT Poll Rate = 100 ms
BT Poll Rate = 150 ms
BT Poll Rate = 200 ms
BT Poll Rate = 500 ms
BT Poll Rate = 990 ms
Bi-Directional Read Disable
Bi-Directional Read Enable
Always On Timeout: 1 Hour
Always On Timeout: 2 Hours
Always On Timeout: 3 Hours
Always On Timeout: 4 Hours
Always On Timeout: 5 Hours










